Random Access Power Control

ABSTRACT

A wireless device transmits a first preamble via a first sub-band. The wireless device determines to perform a first preamble retransmission based on receiving no response to the first preamble. The wireless device selects, for the first preamble retransmission, a second sub-band. Based on the second sub-band being different from the first sub-band, the wireless device determines that a transmission power of the first preamble retransmission may be based on a same value of a power ramping counter used for transmitting the first preamble. The wireless device transmits, based on the transmission power, a second preamble for the first preamble retransmission via the second sub-band.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.62/825,427, filed Mar. 28, 2019, which is hereby incorporated byreference in their entirety.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEVERAL VIEWS OF THE DRAWINGS

Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present disclosureare described herein with reference to the drawings.

Examples of several of the various embodiments of the present disclosureare described herein with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 1 is a diagram of an example RAN architecture as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 2A is a diagram of an example user plane protocol stack as per anaspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 2B is a diagram of an example control plane protocol stack as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 3 is a diagram of an example wireless device and two base stationsas per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C and FIG. 4D are example diagrams for uplinkand downlink signal transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 5A is a diagram of an example uplink channel mapping and exampleuplink physical signals as per an aspect of an embodiment of the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 5B is a diagram of an example downlink channel mapping and exampledownlink physical signals as per an aspect of an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 6 is a diagram depicting an example frame structure as per anaspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B are diagrams depicting example sets of OFDMsubcarriers as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 8 is a diagram depicting example OFDM radio resources as per anaspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 9A is a diagram depicting an example CSI-RS and/or SS blocktransmission in a multi-beam system.

FIG. 9B is a diagram depicting an example downlink beam managementprocedure as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 10 is an example diagram of configured BWPs as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 11A, and FIG. 11B are diagrams of an example multi connectivity asper an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 12 is a diagram of an example random access procedure as per anaspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 13 is a structure of example MAC entities as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 14 is a diagram of an example RAN architecture as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 15 is a diagram of example RRC states as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 15 is a diagram of example RRC states as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 16 is an example two-step RA procedure as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 17A, FIG. 17B, and FIG. 17C are example radio resource allocationsas per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 18 is an example of ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex values as per anaspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 19A is an example RAR format as per an aspect of an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 19B is an example MAC subheader with backoff indicator as per anaspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 19C is an example MAC subheader as per an aspect of an embodimentof the present disclosure.

FIG. 20 is an example MAC RAR formats as per an aspect of an embodimentof the present disclosure.

FIG. 21 is an example RAR format as per an aspect of an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 22A, and FIG. 22B are example RAR formats as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 23 is an example of a coverage of a cell configured with a DL andtwo ULs as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 24 is an example diagram of contention based and contention-freerandom access procedures with LBT as per an aspect of an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 25 is an example diagram of a two-step RA procedure with LBT as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 26 is an example of radio resource allocation for a two-step RAprocedure as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 27 is an example of radio resource allocation for a two-step RAprocedure as per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 28 is example priority orders as per an aspect of an embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 29A, FIG. 29B, and FIG. 29C are examples of the first transmissionoverlapped at least in part in time with the second transmission as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 30 is an example of a priority order determination as per an aspectof an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 31 is an example of a priority of Msg A as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 32 is an example of a priority of Msg A as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 33A is an example of power reduction as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 33B is an example of dropping at least one of UL transmissions asper an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 34 is an example of parameters associated with numerologies as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 35 is an example of backoff parameter values as per an aspect of anembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 36A is an example of PREAMBLE POWER RAMPING COUNTER maintainedacross different channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 36B is an example of PREAMBLE POWER RAMPING COUNTER maintainedacross different channels as per an aspect of an embodiment of thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 37 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 38 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 39 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

FIG. 40 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

Example embodiments of the present disclosure enable operation of randomaccess. Embodiments of the technology disclosed herein may be employedin the technical field of multicarrier communication systems. Moreparticularly, the embodiments of the technology disclosed herein mayrelate to one or more random access procedures in multicarriercommunication systems.

The following Acronyms are used throughout the present disclosure:

3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project

5GC 5G Core Network

ACK Acknowledgement

AMF Access and Mobility Management Function

ARQ Automatic Repeat Request

AS Access Stratum

ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit

BA Bandwidth Adaptation

BCCH Broadcast Control Channel

BCH Broadcast Channel

BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying

BWP Bandwidth Part

CA Carrier Aggregation

CC Component Carrier

CCCH Common Control CHannel

CDMA Code Division Multiple Access

CN Core Network

CP Cyclic Prefix

CP-OFDM Cyclic Prefix-Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex

C-RNTI Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier

CS Configured Scheduling

CSI Channel State Information

CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal

CQI Channel Quality Indicator

CSS Common Search Space

CU Central Unit

DC Dual Connectivity

DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel

DCI Downlink Control Information

DL Downlink

DL-SCH Downlink Shared CHannel

DM-RS DeModulation Reference Signal

DRB Data Radio Bearer

DRX Discontinuous Reception

DTCH Dedicated Traffic CHannel

DU Distributed Unit

EPC Evolved Packet Core

E-UTRA Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access

E-UTRAN Evolved-Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network

FDD Frequency Division Duplex

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Arrays

F1-C F1-Control plane

F1-U F1-User plane

gNB next generation Node B

HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest

HDL Hardware Description Languages

IE Information Element

IP Internet Protocol

LCID Logical Channel IDentifier

LTE Long Term Evolution

MAC Media Access Control

MCG Master Cell Group

MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme

MeNB Master evolved Node B

MIB Master Information Block

MME Mobility Management Entity

MN Master Node

NACK Negative Acknowledgement

NAS Non-Access Stratum

NG CP Next Generation Control Plane

NGC Next Generation Core

NG-C NG-Control plane

ng-eNB next generation evolved Node B

NG-U NG-User plane

NR New Radio

NR MAC New Radio MAC

NR PDCP New Radio PDCP

NR PHY New Radio PHYsical

NR RLC New Radio RLC

NR RRC New Radio RRC

NSSAI Network Slice Selection Assistance Information

O&M Operation and Maintenance

OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

PBCH Physical Broadcast CHannel

PCC Primary Component Carrier

PCCH Paging Control CHannel

PCell Primary Cell

PCH Paging CHannel

PDCCH Physical Downlink Control CHannel

PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol

PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared CHannel

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PHICH Physical HARQ Indicator CHannel

PHY PHYsical

PLMN Public Land Mobile Network

PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator

PRACH Physical Random Access CHannel

PRB Physical Resource Block

PSCell Primary Secondary Cell

PSS Primary Synchronization Signal

pTAG primary Timing Advance Group

PT-RS Phase Tracking Reference Signal

PUCCH Physical Uplink Control CHannel

PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared CHannel

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QFI Quality of Service Indicator

QoS Quality of Service

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

RA Random Access

RACH Random Access CHannel

RAN Radio Access Network

RAT Radio Access Technology

RA-RNTI Random Access-Radio Network Temporary Identifier

RB Resource Blocks

RBG Resource Block Groups

RI Rank Indicator

RLC Radio Link Control

RRC Radio Resource Control

RS Reference Signal

RSRP Reference Signal Received Power

SCC Secondary Component Carrier

SCell Secondary Cell

SCG Secondary Cell Group

SC-FDMA Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access

SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol

SDU Service Data Unit

SeNB Secondary evolved Node B

SFN System Frame Number

S-GW Serving GateWay

SI System Information

SIB System Information Block

SMF Session Management Function

SN Secondary Node

SpCell Special Cell

SRB Signaling Radio Bearer

SRS Sounding Reference Signal

SS Synchronization Signal

SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal

sTAG secondary Timing Advance Group

TA Timing Advance

TAG Timing Advance Group

TAI Tracking Area Identifier

TAT Time Alignment Timer

TB Transport Block

TC-RNTI Temporary Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier

TDD Time Division Duplex

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access

TTI Transmission Time Interval

UCI Uplink Control Information

UE User Equipment

UL Uplink

UL-SCH Uplink Shared CHannel

UPF User Plane Function

UPGW User Plane Gateway

VHDL VHSIC Hardware Description Language

Xn-C Xn-Control plane

Xn-U Xn-User plane

Example embodiments of the disclosure may be implemented using variousphysical layer modulation and transmission mechanisms. Exampletransmission mechanisms may comprise, but are not limited to: CodeDivision Multiple Access (CDMA), Orthogonal Frequency Division MultipleAccess (OFDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Wavelettechnologies, and/or the like. Hybrid transmission mechanisms such asTDMA/CDMA, and OFDM/CDMA may also be employed. Various modulationschemes may be applied for signal transmission in the physical layer.Examples of modulation schemes comprise, but are not limited to: phase,amplitude, code, a combination of these, and/or the like. An exampleradio transmission method may implement Quadrature Amplitude Modulation(QAM) using Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK), Quadrature Phase ShiftKeying (QPSK), 16-QAM, 64-QAM, 256-QAM, and/or the like. Physical radiotransmission may be enhanced by dynamically or semi-dynamically changingthe modulation and coding scheme depending on transmission requirementsand radio conditions.

FIG. 1 is an example Radio Access Network (RAN) architecture as per anaspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. As illustrated inthis example, a RAN node may be a next generation Node B (gNB) (e.g.120A, 120B) providing New Radio (NR) user plane and control planeprotocol terminations towards a first wireless device (e.g. 110A). In anexample, a RAN node may be a next generation evolved Node B (ng-eNB)(e.g. 124A, 124B), providing Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access(E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol terminations towards asecond wireless device (e.g. 110B). The first wireless device maycommunicate with a gNB over a Uu interface. The second wireless devicemay communicate with a ng-eNB over a Uu interface. In this disclosure,wireless device 110A and 110B are structurally similar to wirelessdevice 110. Base stations 120A and/or 120B may be structurally similarlyto base station 120. Base station 120 may comprise at least one of a gNB(e.g. 122A and/or 122B), ng-eNB (e.g. 124A and/or 124B), and or thelike.

A gNB or an ng-eNB may host functions such as: radio resource managementand scheduling, IP header compression, encryption and integrityprotection of data, selection of Access and Mobility Management Function(AMF) at User Equipment (UE) attachment, routing of user plane andcontrol plane data, connection setup and release, scheduling andtransmission of paging messages (originated from the AMF), schedulingand transmission of system broadcast information (originated from theAMF or Operation and Maintenance (O&M)), measurement and measurementreporting configuration, transport level packet marking in the uplink,session management, support of network slicing, Quality of Service (QoS)flow management and mapping to data radio bearers, support of UEs inRRC_INACTIVE state, distribution function for Non-Access Stratum (NAS)messages, RAN sharing, and dual connectivity or tight interworkingbetween NR and E-UTRA.

In an example, one or more gNBs and/or one or more ng-eNBs may beinterconnected with each other by means of Xn interface. A gNB or anng-eNB may be connected by means of NG interfaces to 5G Core Network(5GC). In an example, 5GC may comprise one or more AMF/User PlanFunction (UPF) functions (e.g. 130A or 130B). A gNB or an ng-eNB may beconnected to a UPF by means of an NG-User plane (NG-U) interface. TheNG-U interface may provide delivery (e.g. non-guaranteed delivery) ofuser plane Protocol Data Units (PDUs) between a RAN node and the UPF. AgNB or an ng-eNB may be connected to an AMF by means of an NG-Controlplane (NG-C) interface. The NG-C interface may provide, for example, NGinterface management, UE context management, UE mobility management,transport of NAS messages, paging, PDU session management, configurationtransfer and/or warning message transmission, combinations thereof,and/or the like.

In an example, a UPF may host functions such as anchor point forintra-/inter-Radio Access Technology (RAT) mobility (when applicable),external PDU session point of interconnect to data network, packetrouting and forwarding, packet inspection and user plane part of policyrule enforcement, traffic usage reporting, uplink classifier to supportrouting traffic flows to a data network, branching point to supportmulti-homed PDU session, QoS handling for user plane, e.g. packetfiltering, gating, Uplink (UL)/Downlink (DL) rate enforcement, uplinktraffic verification (e.g. Service Data Flow (SDF) to QoS flow mapping),downlink packet buffering and/or downlink data notification triggering.

In an example, an AMF may host functions such as NAS signalingtermination, NAS signaling security, Access Stratum (AS) securitycontrol, inter Core Network (CN) node signaling for mobility between 3rdGeneration Partnership Project (3GPP) access networks, idle mode UEreachability (e.g., control and execution of paging retransmission),registration area management, support of intra-system and inter-systemmobility, access authentication, access authorization including check ofroaming rights, mobility management control (subscription and policies),support of network slicing and/or Session Management Function (SMF)selection.

FIG. 2A is an example user plane protocol stack, where Service DataAdaptation Protocol (SDAP) (e.g. 211 and 221), Packet Data ConvergenceProtocol (PDCP) (e.g. 212 and 222), Radio Link Control (RLC) (e.g. 213and 223) and Media Access Control (MAC) (e.g. 214 and 224) sublayers andPhysical (PHY) (e.g. 215 and 225) layer may be terminated in wirelessdevice (e.g. 110) and gNB (e.g. 120) on the network side. In an example,a PHY layer provides transport services to higher layers (e.g. MAC, RRC,etc.). In an example, services and functions of a MAC sublayer maycomprise mapping between logical channels and transport channels,multiplexing/demultiplexing of MAC Service Data Units (SDUs) belongingto one or different logical channels into/from Transport Blocks (TB s)delivered to/from the PHY layer, scheduling information reporting, errorcorrection through Hybrid Automatic Repeat request (HARQ) (e.g. one HARQentity per carrier in case of Carrier Aggregation (CA)), priorityhandling between UEs by means of dynamic scheduling, priority handlingbetween logical channels of one UE by means of logical channelprioritization, and/or padding. A MAC entity may support one or multiplenumerologies and/or transmission timings. In an example, mappingrestrictions in a logical channel prioritization may control whichnumerology and/or transmission timing a logical channel may use. In anexample, an RLC sublayer may supports transparent mode (TM),unacknowledged mode (UM) and acknowledged mode (AM) transmission modes.The RLC configuration may be per logical channel with no dependency onnumerologies and/or Transmission Time Interval (TTI) durations. In anexample, Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) may operate on any of thenumerologies and/or TTI durations the logical channel is configuredwith. In an example, services and functions of the PDCP layer for theuser plane may comprise sequence numbering, header compression anddecompression, transfer of user data, reordering and duplicatedetection, PDCP PDU routing (e.g. in case of split bearers),retransmission of PDCP SDUs, ciphering, deciphering and integrityprotection, PDCP SDU discard, PDCP re-establishment and data recoveryfor RLC AM, and/or duplication of PDCP PDUs. In an example, services andfunctions of SDAP may comprise mapping between a QoS flow and a dataradio bearer. In an example, services and functions of SDAP may comprisemapping Quality of Service Indicator (QFI) in DL and UL packets. In anexample, a protocol entity of SDAP may be configured for an individualPDU session.

FIG. 2B is an example control plane protocol stack where PDCP (e.g. 233and 242), RLC (e.g. 234 and 243) and MAC (e.g. 235 and 244) sublayersand PHY (e.g. 236 and 245) layer may be terminated in wireless device(e.g. 110) and gNB (e.g. 120) on a network side and perform service andfunctions described above. In an example, RRC (e.g. 232 and 241) may beterminated in a wireless device and a gNB on a network side. In anexample, services and functions of RRC may comprise broadcast of systeminformation related to AS and NAS, paging initiated by 5GC or RAN,establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between theUE and RAN, security functions including key management, establishment,configuration, maintenance and release of Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs)and Data Radio Bearers (DRBs), mobility functions, QoS managementfunctions, UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting,detection of and recovery from radio link failure, and/or NAS messagetransfer to/from NAS from/to a UE. In an example, NAS control protocol(e.g. 231 and 251) may be terminated in the wireless device and AMF(e.g. 130) on a network side and may perform functions such asauthentication, mobility management between a UE and an AMF for 3GPPaccess and non-3GPP access, and session management between a UE and aSMF for 3GPP access and non-3GPP access.

In an example, a base station may configure a plurality of logicalchannels for a wireless device. A logical channel in the plurality oflogical channels may correspond to a radio bearer and the radio bearermay be associated with a QoS requirement. In an example, a base stationmay configure a logical channel to be mapped to one or moreTTIs/numerologies in a plurality of TTIs/numerologies. The wirelessdevice may receive a Downlink Control Information (DCI) via PhysicalDownlink Control CHannel (PDCCH) indicating an uplink grant. In anexample, the uplink grant may be for a first TTI/numerology and mayindicate uplink resources for transmission of a transport block. Thebase station may configure each logical channel in the plurality oflogical channels with one or more parameters to be used by a logicalchannel prioritization procedure at the MAC layer of the wirelessdevice. The one or more parameters may comprise priority, prioritizedbit rate, etc. A logical channel in the plurality of logical channelsmay correspond to one or more buffers comprising data associated withthe logical channel. The logical channel prioritization procedure mayallocate the uplink resources to one or more first logical channels inthe plurality of logical channels and/or one or more MAC ControlElements (CEs). The one or more first logical channels may be mapped tothe first TTI/numerology. The MAC layer at the wireless device maymultiplex one or more MAC CEs and/or one or more MAC SDUs (e.g., logicalchannel) in a MAC PDU (e.g., transport block). In an example, the MACPDU may comprise a MAC header comprising a plurality of MAC sub-headers.A MAC sub-header in the plurality of MAC sub-headers may correspond to aMAC CE or a MAC SUD (logical channel) in the one or more MAC CEs and/orone or more MAC SDUs. In an example, a MAC CE or a logical channel maybe configured with a Logical Channel IDentifier (LCID). In an example,LCID for a logical channel or a MAC CE may be fixed/pre-configured. Inan example, LCID for a logical channel or MAC CE may be configured forthe wireless device by the base station. The MAC sub-headercorresponding to a MAC CE or a MAC SDU may comprise LCID associated withthe MAC CE or the MAC SDU.

In an example, a base station may activate and/or deactivate and/orimpact one or more processes (e.g., set values of one or more parametersof the one or more processes or start and/or stop one or more timers ofthe one or more processes) at the wireless device by employing one ormore MAC commands. The one or more MAC commands may comprise one or moreMAC control elements. In an example, the one or more processes maycomprise activation and/or deactivation of PDCP packet duplication forone or more radio bearers. The base station may transmit a MAC CEcomprising one or more fields, the values of the fields indicatingactivation and/or deactivation of PDCP duplication for the one or moreradio bearers. In an example, the one or more processes may compriseChannel State Information (CSI) transmission of on one or more cells.The base station may transmit one or more MAC CEs indicating activationand/or deactivation of the CSI transmission on the one or more cells. Inan example, the one or more processes may comprise activation ordeactivation of one or more secondary cells. In an example, the basestation may transmit a MA CE indicating activation or deactivation ofone or more secondary cells. In an example, the base station maytransmit one or more MAC CEs indicating starting and/or stopping one ormore Discontinuous Reception (DRX) timers at the wireless device. In anexample, the base station may transmit one or more MAC CEs indicatingone or more timing advance values for one or more Timing Advance Groups(TAGs).

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of base stations (base station 1, 120A, andbase station 2, 120B) and a wireless device 110. A wireless device maybe called a UE. A base station may be called a NB, eNB, gNB, and/orng-eNB. In an example, a wireless device and/or a base station may actas a relay node. The base station 1, 120A, may comprise at least onecommunication interface 320A (e.g. a wireless modem, an antenna, a wiredmodem, and/or the like), at least one processor 321A, and at least oneset of program code instructions 323A stored in non-transitory memory322A and executable by the at least one processor 321A. The base station2, 120B, may comprise at least one communication interface 320B, atleast one processor 321B, and at least one set of program codeinstructions 323B stored in non-transitory memory 322B and executable bythe at least one processor 321B.

A base station may comprise many sectors for example: 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6sectors. A base station may comprise many cells, for example, rangingfrom 1 to 50 cells or more. A cell may be categorized, for example, as aprimary cell or secondary cell. At Radio Resource Control (RRC)connection establishment/re-establishment/handover, one serving cell mayprovide the NAS (non-access stratum) mobility information (e.g. TrackingArea Identifier (TAI)). At RRC connection re-establishment/handover, oneserving cell may provide the security input. This cell may be referredto as the Primary Cell (PCell). In the downlink, a carrier correspondingto the PCell may be a DL Primary Component Carrier (PCC), while in theuplink, a carrier may be an UL PCC. Depending on wireless devicecapabilities, Secondary Cells (SCells) may be configured to formtogether with a PCell a set of serving cells. In a downlink, a carriercorresponding to an SCell may be a downlink secondary component carrier(DL SCC), while in an uplink, a carrier may be an uplink secondarycomponent carrier (UL SCC). An SCell may or may not have an uplinkcarrier.

A cell, comprising a downlink carrier and optionally an uplink carrier,may be assigned a physical cell ID and a cell index. A carrier (downlinkor uplink) may belong to one cell. The cell ID or cell index may alsoidentify the downlink carrier or uplink carrier of the cell (dependingon the context it is used). In the disclosure, a cell ID may be equallyreferred to a carrier ID, and a cell index may be referred to a carrierindex. In an implementation, a physical cell ID or a cell index may beassigned to a cell. A cell ID may be determined using a synchronizationsignal transmitted on a downlink carrier. A cell index may be determinedusing RRC messages. For example, when the disclosure refers to a firstphysical cell ID for a first downlink carrier, the disclosure may meanthe first physical cell ID is for a cell comprising the first downlinkcarrier. The same concept may apply to, for example, carrier activation.When the disclosure indicates that a first carrier is activated, thespecification may equally mean that a cell comprising the first carrieris activated.

A base station may transmit to a wireless device one or more messages(e.g. RRC messages) comprising a plurality of configuration parametersfor one or more cells. One or more cells may comprise at least oneprimary cell and at least one secondary cell. In an example, an RRCmessage may be broadcasted or unicasted to the wireless device. In anexample, configuration parameters may comprise common parameters anddedicated parameters.

Services and/or functions of an RRC sublayer may comprise at least oneof: broadcast of system information related to AS and NAS; paginginitiated by 5GC and/or NG-RAN; establishment, maintenance, and/orrelease of an RRC connection between a wireless device and NG-RAN, whichmay comprise at least one of addition, modification and release ofcarrier aggregation; or addition, modification, and/or release of dualconnectivity in NR or between E-UTRA and NR. Services and/or functionsof an RRC sublayer may further comprise at least one of securityfunctions comprising key management; establishment, configuration,maintenance, and/or release of Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) and/orData Radio Bearers (DRBs); mobility functions which may comprise atleast one of a handover (e.g. intra NR mobility or inter-RAT mobility)and a context transfer; or a wireless device cell selection andreselection and control of cell selection and reselection. Servicesand/or functions of an RRC sublayer may further comprise at least one ofQoS management functions; a wireless device measurementconfiguration/reporting; detection of and/or recovery from radio linkfailure; or NAS message transfer to/from a core network entity (e.g.AMF, Mobility Management Entity (MME)) from/to the wireless device.

An RRC sublayer may support an RRC_Idle state, an RRC_Inactive stateand/or an RRC_Connected state for a wireless device. In an RRC_Idlestate, a wireless device may perform at least one of: Public Land MobileNetwork (PLMN) selection; receiving broadcasted system information; cellselection/re-selection; monitoring/receiving a paging for mobileterminated data initiated by 5GC; paging for mobile terminated data areamanaged by 5GC; or DRX for CN paging configured via NAS. In anRRC_Inactive state, a wireless device may perform at least one of:receiving broadcasted system information; cell selection/re-selection;monitoring/receiving a RAN/CN paging initiated by NG-RAN/5GC; RAN-basednotification area (RNA) managed by NG-RAN; or DRX for RAN/CN pagingconfigured by NG-RAN/NAS. In an RRC_Idle state of a wireless device, abase station (e.g. NG-RAN) may keep a 5GC-NG-RAN connection (bothC/U-planes) for the wireless device; and/or store a UE AS context forthe wireless device. In an RRC_Connected state of a wireless device, abase station (e.g. NG-RAN) may perform at least one of: establishment of5GC-NG-RAN connection (both C/U-planes) for the wireless device; storinga UE AS context for the wireless device; transmit/receive of unicastdata to/from the wireless device; or network-controlled mobility basedon measurement results received from the wireless device. In anRRC_Connected state of a wireless device, an NG-RAN may know a cell thatthe wireless device belongs to.

System information (SI) may be divided into minimum SI and other SI. Theminimum SI may be periodically broadcast. The minimum SI may comprisebasic information required for initial access and information foracquiring any other SI broadcast periodically or provisioned on-demand,i.e. scheduling information. The other SI may either be broadcast, or beprovisioned in a dedicated manner, either triggered by a network or uponrequest from a wireless device. A minimum SI may be transmitted via twodifferent downlink channels using different messages (e.g.MasterinformationBlock and SystemInformationBlockType1). Another SI maybe transmitted via SystemInformationBlockType2. For a wireless device inan RRC_Connected state, dedicated RRC signaling may be employed for therequest and delivery of the other SI. For the wireless device in theRRC_Idle state and/or the RRC_Inactive state, the request may trigger arandom-access procedure.

A wireless device may report its radio access capability informationwhich may be static. A base station may request what capabilities for awireless device to report based on band information. When allowed by anetwork, a temporary capability restriction request may be sent by thewireless device to signal the limited availability of some capabilities(e.g. due to hardware sharing, interference or overheating) to the basestation. The base station may confirm or reject the request. Thetemporary capability restriction may be transparent to 5GC (e.g., staticcapabilities may be stored in 5GC).

When CA is configured, a wireless device may have an RRC connection witha network. At RRC connection establishment/re-establishment/handoverprocedure, one serving cell may provide NAS mobility information, and atRRC connection re-establishment/handover, one serving cell may provide asecurity input. This cell may be referred to as the PCell. Depending onthe capabilities of the wireless device, SCells may be configured toform together with the PCell a set of serving cells. The configured setof serving cells for the wireless device may comprise one PCell and oneor more SCells.

The reconfiguration, addition and removal of SCells may be performed byRRC. At intra-NR handover, RRC may also add, remove, or reconfigureSCells for usage with the target PCell. When adding a new SCell,dedicated RRC signaling may be employed to send all required systeminformation of the SCell i.e. while in connected mode, wireless devicesmay not need to acquire broadcasted system information directly from theSCells.

The purpose of an RRC connection reconfiguration procedure may be tomodify an RRC connection, (e.g. to establish, modify and/or release RBs,to perform handover, to setup, modify, and/or release measurements, toadd, modify, and/or release SCells and cell groups). As part of the RRCconnection reconfiguration procedure, NAS dedicated information may betransferred from the network to the wireless device. TheRRCConnectionReconfiguration message may be a command to modify an RRCconnection. It may convey information for measurement configuration,mobility control, radio resource configuration (e.g. RBs, MAC mainconfiguration and physical channel configuration) comprising anyassociated dedicated NAS information and security configuration. If thereceived RRC Connection Reconfiguration message comprises thesCellToReleaseList, the wireless device may perform an SCell release. Ifthe received RRC Connection Reconfiguration message comprises thesCellToAddModList, the wireless device may perform SCell additions ormodification.

An RRC connection establishment (or reestablishment, resume) proceduremay be to establish (or reestablish, resume) an RRC connection. an RRCconnection establishment procedure may comprise SRB1 establishment. TheRRC connection establishment procedure may be used to transfer theinitial NAS dedicated information/message from a wireless device toE-UTRAN. The RRCConnectionReestablishment message may be used tore-establish SRB1.

A measurement report procedure may be to transfer measurement resultsfrom a wireless device to NG-RAN. The wireless device may initiate ameasurement report procedure after successful security activation. Ameasurement report message may be employed to transmit measurementresults.

The wireless device 110 may comprise at least one communicationinterface 310 (e.g. a wireless modem, an antenna, and/or the like), atleast one processor 314, and at least one set of program codeinstructions 316 stored in non-transitory memory 315 and executable bythe at least one processor 314. The wireless device 110 may furthercomprise at least one of at least one speaker/microphone 311, at leastone keypad 312, at least one display/touchpad 313, at least one powersource 317, at least one global positioning system (GPS) chipset 318,and other peripherals 319.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110, the processor 321A of thebase station 1 120A, and/or the processor 321B of the base station 2120B may comprise at least one of a general-purpose processor, a digitalsignal processor (DSP), a controller, a microcontroller, an applicationspecific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array(FPGA) and/or other programmable logic device, discrete gate and/ortransistor logic, discrete hardware components, and the like. Theprocessor 314 of the wireless device 110, the processor 321A in basestation 1 120A, and/or the processor 321B in base station 2 120B mayperform at least one of signal coding/processing, data processing, powercontrol, input/output processing, and/or any other functionality thatmay enable the wireless device 110, the base station 1 120A and/or thebase station 2 120B to operate in a wireless environment.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110 may be connected to thespeaker/microphone 311, the keypad 312, and/or the display/touchpad 313.The processor 314 may receive user input data from and/or provide useroutput data to the speaker/microphone 311, the keypad 312, and/or thedisplay/touchpad 313. The processor 314 in the wireless device 110 mayreceive power from the power source 317 and/or may be configured todistribute the power to the other components in the wireless device 110.The power source 317 may comprise at least one of one or more dry cellbatteries, solar cells, fuel cells, and the like. The processor 314 maybe connected to the GPS chipset 318. The GPS chipset 318 may beconfigured to provide geographic location information of the wirelessdevice 110.

The processor 314 of the wireless device 110 may further be connected toother peripherals 319, which may comprise one or more software and/orhardware modules that provide additional features and/orfunctionalities. For example, the peripherals 319 may comprise at leastone of an accelerometer, a satellite transceiver, a digital camera, auniversal serial bus (USB) port, a hands-free headset, a frequencymodulated (FM) radio unit, a media player, an Internet browser, and thelike.

The communication interface 320A of the base station 1, 120A, and/or thecommunication interface 320B of the base station 2, 120B, may beconfigured to communicate with the communication interface 310 of thewireless device 110 via a wireless link 330A and/or a wireless link 330Brespectively. In an example, the communication interface 320A of thebase station 1, 120A, may communicate with the communication interface320B of the base station 2 and other RAN and core network nodes.

The wireless link 330A and/or the wireless link 330B may comprise atleast one of a bidirectional link and/or a directional link. Thecommunication interface 310 of the wireless device 110 may be configuredto communicate with the communication interface 320A of the base station1 120A and/or with the communication interface 320B of the base station2 120B. The base station 1 120A and the wireless device 110 and/or thebase station 2 120B and the wireless device 110 may be configured tosend and receive transport blocks via the wireless link 330A and/or viathe wireless link 330B, respectively. The wireless link 330A and/or thewireless link 330B may employ at least one frequency carrier. Accordingto some of various aspects of embodiments, transceiver(s) may beemployed. A transceiver may be a device that comprises both atransmitter and a receiver. Transceivers may be employed in devices suchas wireless devices, base stations, relay nodes, and/or the like.Example embodiments for radio technology implemented in thecommunication interface 310, 320A, 320B and the wireless link 330A, 330Bare illustrated in FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C, FIG. 4D, FIG. 6, FIG. 7A,FIG. 7B, FIG. 8, and associated text.

In an example, other nodes in a wireless network (e.g. AMF, UPF, SMF,etc.) may comprise one or more communication interfaces, one or moreprocessors, and memory storing instructions.

A node (e.g. wireless device, base station, AMF, SMF, UPF, servers,switches, antennas, and/or the like) may comprise one or moreprocessors, and memory storing instructions that when executed by theone or more processors causes the node to perform certain processesand/or functions. Example embodiments may enable operation ofsingle-carrier and/or multi-carrier communications. Other exampleembodiments may comprise a non-transitory tangible computer readablemedia comprising instructions executable by one or more processors tocause operation of single-carrier and/or multi-carrier communications.Yet other example embodiments may comprise an article of manufacturethat comprises a non-transitory tangible computer readablemachine-accessible medium having instructions encoded thereon forenabling programmable hardware to cause a node to enable operation ofsingle-carrier and/or multi-carrier communications. The node maycomprise processors, memory, interfaces, and/or the like.

An interface may comprise at least one of a hardware interface, afirmware interface, a software interface, and/or a combination thereof.The hardware interface may comprise connectors, wires, electronicdevices such as drivers, amplifiers, and/or the like. The softwareinterface may comprise code stored in a memory device to implementprotocol(s), protocol layers, communication drivers, device drivers,combinations thereof, and/or the like. The firmware interface maycomprise a combination of embedded hardware and code stored in and/or incommunication with a memory device to implement connections, electronicdevice operations, protocol(s), protocol layers, communication drivers,device drivers, hardware operations, combinations thereof, and/or thelike.

FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C and FIG. 4D are example diagrams for uplinkand downlink signal transmission as per an aspect of an embodiment ofthe present disclosure. FIG. 4A shows an example uplink transmitter forat least one physical channel. A baseband signal representing a physicaluplink shared channel may perform one or more functions. The one or morefunctions may comprise at least one of: scrambling; modulation ofscrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols; mapping of thecomplex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmissionlayers; transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols;precoding of the complex-valued symbols; mapping of precodedcomplex-valued symbols to resource elements; generation ofcomplex-valued time-domain Single Carrier-Frequency Division MultipleAccess (SC-FDMA) or CP-OFDM signal for an antenna port; and/or the like.In an example, when transform precoding is enabled, a SC-FDMA signal foruplink transmission may be generated. In an example, when transformprecoding is not enabled, an CP-OFDM signal for uplink transmission maybe generated by FIG. 4A. These functions are illustrated as examples andit is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implemented in variousembodiments.

An example structure for modulation and up-conversion to the carrierfrequency of the complex-valued SC-FDMA or CP-OFDM baseband signal foran antenna port and/or the complex-valued Physical Random Access CHannel(PRACH) baseband signal is shown in FIG. 4B. Filtering may be employedprior to transmission.

An example structure for downlink transmissions is shown in FIG. 4C. Thebaseband signal representing a downlink physical channel may perform oneor more functions. The one or more functions may comprise: scrambling ofcoded bits in a codeword to be transmitted on a physical channel;modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulationsymbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one orseveral transmission layers; precoding of the complex-valued modulationsymbols on a layer for transmission on the antenna ports; mapping ofcomplex-valued modulation symbols for an antenna port to resourceelements; generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for anantenna port; and/or the like. These functions are illustrated asexamples and it is anticipated that other mechanisms may be implementedin various embodiments.

In an example, a base station may transmit a first symbol and a secondsymbol on an antenna port, to a wireless device. The wireless device mayinfer the channel (e.g., fading gain, multipath delay, etc.) forconveying the second symbol on the antenna port, from the channel forconveying the first symbol on the antenna port. In an example, a firstantenna port and a second antenna port may be quasi co-located if one ormore large-scale properties of the channel over which a first symbol onthe first antenna port is conveyed may be inferred from the channel overwhich a second symbol on a second antenna port is conveyed. The one ormore large-scale properties may comprise at least one of: delay spread;doppler spread; doppler shift; average gain; average delay; and/orspatial Receiving (Rx) parameters.

An example modulation and up-conversion to the carrier frequency of thecomplex-valued OFDM baseband signal for an antenna port is shown in FIG.4D. Filtering may be employed prior to transmission.

FIG. 5A is a diagram of an example uplink channel mapping and exampleuplink physical signals. FIG. 5B is a diagram of an example downlinkchannel mapping and a downlink physical signal. In an example, aphysical layer may provide one or more information transfer services toa MAC and/or one or more higher layers. For example, the physical layermay provide the one or more information transfer services to the MAC viaone or more transport channels. An information transfer service mayindicate how and with what characteristics data are transferred over theradio interface.

In an example embodiment, a radio network may comprise one or moredownlink and/or uplink transport channels. For example, a diagram inFIG. 5A shows example uplink transport channels comprising Uplink-SharedCHannel (UL-SCH) 501 and Random Access CHannel (RACH) 502. A diagram inFIG. 5B shows example downlink transport channels comprisingDownlink-Shared CHannel (DL-SCH) 511, Paging CHannel (PCH) 512, andBroadcast CHannel (BCH) 513. A transport channel may be mapped to one ormore corresponding physical channels. For example, UL-SCH 501 may bemapped to Physical Uplink Shared CHannel (PUSCH) 503. RACH 502 may bemapped to PRACH 505. DL-SCH 511 and PCH 512 may be mapped to PhysicalDownlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) 514. BCH 513 may be mapped to PhysicalBroadcast CHannel (PBCH) 516.

There may be one or more physical channels without a correspondingtransport channel. The one or more physical channels may be employed forUplink Control Information (UCI) 509 and/or Downlink Control Information(DCI) 517. For example, Physical Uplink Control CHannel (PUCCH) 504 maycarry UCI 509 from a UE to a base station. For example, PhysicalDownlink Control CHannel (PDCCH) 515 may carry DCI 517 from a basestation to a UE. NR may support UCI 509 multiplexing in PUSCH 503 whenUCI 509 and PUSCH 503 transmissions may coincide in a slot at least inpart. The UCI 509 may comprise at least one of CSI, Acknowledgement(ACK)/Negative Acknowledgement (NACK), and/or scheduling request. TheDCI 517 on PDCCH 515 may indicate at least one of following: one or moredownlink assignments and/or one or more uplink scheduling grants

In uplink, a UE may transmit one or more Reference Signals (RSs) to abase station. For example, the one or more RSs may be at least one ofDemodulation-RS (DM-RS) 506, Phase Tracking-RS (PT-RS) 507, and/orSounding RS (SRS) 508. In downlink, a base station may transmit (e.g.,unicast, multicast, and/or broadcast) one or more RSs to a UE. Forexample, the one or more RSs may be at least one of PrimarySynchronization Signal (PSS)/Secondary Synchronization Signal (SSS) 521,CSI-RS 522, DM-RS 523, and/or PT-RS 524.

In an example, a UE may transmit one or more uplink DM-RSs 506 to a basestation for channel estimation, for example, for coherent demodulationof one or more uplink physical channels (e.g., PUSCH 503 and/or PUCCH504). For example, a UE may transmit a base station at least one uplinkDM-RS 506 with PUSCH 503 and/or PUCCH 504, wherein the at least oneuplink DM-RS 506 may be spanning a same frequency range as acorresponding physical channel. In an example, a base station mayconfigure a UE with one or more uplink DM-RS configurations. At leastone DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Afront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., 1or 2 adjacent OFDM symbols). One or more additional uplink DM-RS may beconfigured to transmit at one or more symbols of a PUSCH and/or PUCCH. Abase station may semi-statically configure a UE with a maximum number offront-loaded DM-RS symbols for PUSCH and/or PUCCH. For example, a UE mayschedule a single-symbol DM-RS and/or double symbol DM-RS based on amaximum number of front-loaded DM-RS symbols, wherein a base station mayconfigure the UE with one or more additional uplink DM-RS for PUSCHand/or PUCCH. A new radio network may support, e.g., at least forCP-OFDM, a common DM-RS structure for DL and UL, wherein a DM-RSlocation, DM-RS pattern, and/or scrambling sequence may be same ordifferent.

In an example, whether uplink PT-RS 507 is present or not may depend onan RRC configuration. For example, a presence of uplink PT-RS may beUE-specifically configured. For example, a presence and/or a pattern ofuplink PT-RS 507 in a scheduled resource may be UE-specificallyconfigured by a combination of RRC signaling and/or association with oneor more parameters employed for other purposes (e.g., Modulation andCoding Scheme (MCS)) which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, adynamic presence of uplink PT-RS 507 may be associated with one or moreDCI parameters comprising at least MCS. A radio network may supportplurality of uplink PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain.When present, a frequency domain density may be associated with at leastone configuration of a scheduled bandwidth. A UE may assume a sameprecoding for a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports maybe fewer than a number of DM-RS ports in a scheduled resource. Forexample, uplink PT-RS 507 may be confined in the scheduledtime/frequency duration for a UE.

In an example, a UE may transmit SRS 508 to a base station for channelstate estimation to support uplink channel dependent scheduling and/orlink adaptation. For example, SRS 508 transmitted by a UE may allow fora base station to estimate an uplink channel state at one or moredifferent frequencies. A base station scheduler may employ an uplinkchannel state to assign one or more resource blocks of good quality foran uplink PUSCH transmission from a UE. A base station maysemi-statically configure a UE with one or more SRS resource sets. Foran SRS resource set, a base station may configure a UE with one or moreSRS resources. An SRS resource set applicability may be configured by ahigher layer (e.g., RRC) parameter. For example, when a higher layerparameter indicates beam management, an SRS resource in each of one ormore SRS resource sets may be transmitted at a time instant. A UE maytransmit one or more SRS resources in different SRS resource setssimultaneously. A new radio network may support aperiodic, periodicand/or semi-persistent SRS transmissions. A UE may transmit SRSresources based on one or more trigger types, wherein the one or moretrigger types may comprise higher layer signaling (e.g., RRC) and/or oneor more DCI formats (e.g., at least one DCI format may be employed for aUE to select at least one of one or more configured SRS resource sets.An SRS trigger type 0 may refer to an SRS triggered based on a higherlayer signaling. An SRS trigger type 1 may refer to an SRS triggeredbased on one or more DCI formats. In an example, when PUSCH 503 and SRS508 are transmitted in a same slot, a UE may be configured to transmitSRS 508 after a transmission of PUSCH 503 and corresponding uplink DM-RS506.

In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE withone or more SRS configuration parameters indicating at least one offollowing: a SRS resource configuration identifier, a number of SRSports, time domain behavior of SRS resource configuration (e.g., anindication of periodic, semi-persistent, or aperiodic SRS), slot(mini-slot, and/or subframe) level periodicity and/or offset for aperiodic and/or aperiodic SRS resource, a number of OFDM symbols in aSRS resource, starting OFDM symbol of a SRS resource, a SRS bandwidth, afrequency hopping bandwidth, a cyclic shift, and/or a SRS sequence ID.

In an example, in a time domain, an SS/PBCH block (SSB) may comprise oneor more OFDM symbols (e.g., 4 OFDM symbols numbered in increasing orderfrom 0 to 3) within the SS/PBCH block. An SS/PBCH block may comprisePSS/SSS 521 and PBCH 516. In an example, in the frequency domain, anSS/PBCH block may comprise one or more contiguous subcarriers (e.g., 240contiguous subcarriers with the subcarriers numbered in increasing orderfrom 0 to 239) within the SS/PBCH block. For example, a PSS/SSS 521 mayoccupy 1 OFDM symbol and 127 subcarriers. For example, PBCH 516 may spanacross 3 OFDM symbols and 240 subcarriers. A UE may assume that one ormore SS/PBCH blocks transmitted with a same block index may be quasico-located, e.g., with respect to Doppler spread, Doppler shift, averagegain, average delay, and spatial Rx parameters. A UE may not assumequasi co-location for other SS/PBCH block transmissions. A periodicityof an SS/PBCH block may be configured by a radio network (e.g., by anRRC signaling) and one or more time locations where the SS/PBCH blockmay be sent may be determined by sub-carrier spacing. In an example, aUE may assume a band-specific sub-carrier spacing for an SS/PBCH blockunless a radio network has configured a UE to assume a differentsub-carrier spacing.

In an example, downlink CSI-RS 522 may be employed for a UE to acquirechannel state information. A radio network may support periodic,aperiodic, and/or semi-persistent transmission of downlink CSI-RS 522.For example, a base station may semi-statically configure and/orreconfigure a UE with periodic transmission of downlink CSI-RS 522. Aconfigured CSI-RS resources may be activated ad/or deactivated. Forsemi-persistent transmission, an activation and/or deactivation ofCSI-RS resource may be triggered dynamically. In an example, CSI-RSconfiguration may comprise one or more parameters indicating at least anumber of antenna ports. For example, a base station may configure a UEwith 32 ports. A base station may semi-statically configure a UE withone or more CSI-RS resource sets. One or more CSI-RS resources may beallocated from one or more CSI-RS resource sets to one or more UEs. Forexample, a base station may semi-statically configure one or moreparameters indicating CSI RS resource mapping, for example, time-domainlocation of one or more CSI-RS resources, a bandwidth of a CSI-RSresource, and/or a periodicity. In an example, a UE may be configured toemploy a same OFDM symbols for downlink CSI-RS 522 and control resourceset (coreset) when the downlink CSI-RS 522 and coreset are spatiallyquasi co-located and resource elements associated with the downlinkCSI-RS 522 are the outside of PRBs configured for coreset. In anexample, a UE may be configured to employ a same OFDM symbols fordownlink CSI-RS 522 and SSB/PBCH when the downlink CSI-RS 522 andSSB/PBCH are spatially quasi co-located and resource elements associatedwith the downlink CSI-RS 522 are the outside of PRBs configured forSSB/PBCH.

In an example, a UE may transmit one or more downlink DM-RS s 523 to abase station for channel estimation, for example, for coherentdemodulation of one or more downlink physical channels (e.g., PDSCH514). For example, a radio network may support one or more variableand/or configurable DM-RS patterns for data demodulation. At least onedownlink DM-RS configuration may support a front-loaded DM-RS pattern. Afront-loaded DM-RS may be mapped over one or more OFDM symbols (e.g., 1or 2 adjacent OFDM symbols). A base station may semi-staticallyconfigure a UE with a maximum number of front-loaded DM-RS symbols forPDSCH 514. For example, a DM-RS configuration may support one or moreDM-RS ports. For example, for single user-MIMO, a DM-RS configurationmay support at least 8 orthogonal downlink DM-RS ports. For example, formultiuser-MIMO, a DM-RS configuration may support 12 orthogonal downlinkDM-RS ports. A radio network may support, e.g., at least for CP-OFDM, acommon DM-RS structure for DL and UL, wherein a DM-RS location, DM-RSpattern, and/or scrambling sequence may be same or different.

In an example, whether downlink PT-RS 524 is present or not may dependon an RRC configuration. For example, a presence of downlink PT-RS 524may be UE-specifically configured. For example, a presence and/or apattern of downlink PT-RS 524 in a scheduled resource may beUE-specifically configured by a combination of RRC signaling and/orassociation with one or more parameters employed for other purposes(e.g., MCS) which may be indicated by DCI. When configured, a dynamicpresence of downlink PT-RS 524 may be associated with one or more DCIparameters comprising at least MCS. A radio network may supportplurality of PT-RS densities defined in time/frequency domain. Whenpresent, a frequency domain density may be associated with at least oneconfiguration of a scheduled bandwidth. A UE may assume a same precodingfor a DMRS port and a PT-RS port. A number of PT-RS ports may be fewerthan a number of DM-RS ports in a scheduled resource. For example,downlink PT-RS 524 may be confined in the scheduled time/frequencyduration for a UE.

FIG. 6 is a diagram depicting an example frame structure for a carrieras per an aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. Amulticarrier OFDM communication system may comprise one or morecarriers, for example, ranging from 1 to 32 carriers, in case of carrieraggregation, or ranging from 1 to 64 carriers, in case of dualconnectivity. Different radio frame structures may be supported (e.g.,for FDD and for TDD duplex mechanisms). FIG. 6 shows an example framestructure. Downlink and uplink transmissions may be organized into radioframes 601. In this example, radio frame duration is 10 ms. In thisexample, a 10 ms radio frame 601 may be divided into ten equally sizedsubframes 602 with 1 ms duration. Subframe(s) may comprise one or moreslots (e.g. slots 603 and 605) depending on subcarrier spacing and/or CPlength. For example, a subframe with 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz,240 kHz and 480 kHz subcarrier spacing may comprise one, two, four,eight, sixteen and thirty-two slots, respectively. In FIG. 6, a subframemay be divided into two equally sized slots 603 with 0.5 ms duration.For example, 10 subframes may be available for downlink transmission and10 subframes may be available for uplink transmissions in a 10 msinterval. Uplink and downlink transmissions may be separated in thefrequency domain. Slot(s) may comprise a plurality of OFDM symbols 604.The number of OFDM symbols 604 in a slot 605 may depend on the cyclicprefix length. For example, a slot may be 14 OFDM symbols for the samesubcarrier spacing of up to 480 kHz with normal CP. A slot may be 12OFDM symbols for the same subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz with extended CP.A slot may contain downlink, uplink, or a downlink part and an uplinkpart and/or alike.

FIG. 7A is a diagram depicting example sets of OFDM subcarriers as peran aspect of an embodiment of the present disclosure. In the example, agNB may communicate with a wireless device with a carrier with anexample channel bandwidth 700. Arrow(s) in the diagram may depict asubcarrier in a multicarrier OFDM system. The OFDM system may usetechnology such as OFDM technology, SC-FDMA technology, and/or the like.In an example, an arrow 701 shows a subcarrier transmitting informationsymbols. In an example, a subcarrier spacing 702, between two contiguoussubcarriers in a carrier, may be any one of 15 KHz, 30 KHz, 60 KHz, 120KHz, 240 KHz etc. In an example, different subcarrier spacing maycorrespond to different transmission numerologies. In an example, atransmission numerology may comprise at least: a numerology index; avalue of subcarrier spacing; a type of cyclic prefix (CP). In anexample, a gNB may transmit to/receive from a UE on a number ofsubcarriers 703 in a carrier. In an example, a bandwidth occupied by anumber of subcarriers 703 (transmission bandwidth) may be smaller thanthe channel bandwidth 700 of a carrier, due to guard band 704 and 705.In an example, a guard band 704 and 705 may be used to reduceinterference to and from one or more neighbor carriers. A number ofsubcarriers (transmission bandwidth) in a carrier may depend on thechannel bandwidth of the carrier and the subcarrier spacing. Forexample, a transmission bandwidth, for a carrier with 20 MHz channelbandwidth and 15 KHz subcarrier spacing, may be in number of 1024subcarriers.

In an example, a gNB and a wireless device may communicate with multipleCCs when configured with CA. In an example, different component carriersmay have different bandwidth and/or subcarrier spacing, if CA issupported. In an example, a gNB may transmit a first type of service toa UE on a first component carrier. The base station may transmit asecond type of service to the UE on a second component carrier.Different type of services may have different service requirement (e.g.,data rate, latency, reliability), which may be suitable for transmissionvia different component carrier having different subcarrier spacingand/or bandwidth. FIG. 7B shows an example embodiment. A first componentcarrier may comprise a first number of subcarriers 706 with a firstsubcarrier spacing 709. A second component carrier may comprise a secondnumber of subcarriers 707 with a second subcarrier spacing 710. A thirdcomponent carrier may comprise a third number of subcarriers 708 with athird subcarrier spacing 711. Carriers in a multicarrier OFDMcommunication system may be contiguous carriers, non-contiguouscarriers, or a combination of both contiguous and non-contiguouscarriers.

FIG. 8 is a diagram depicting OFDM radio resources as per an aspect ofan embodiment of the present disclosure. In an example, a carrier mayhave a transmission bandwidth 801. In an example, a resource grid may bein a structure of frequency domain 802 and time domain 803. In anexample, a resource grid may comprise a first number of OFDM symbols ina subframe and a second number of resource blocks, starting from acommon resource block indicated by higher-layer signaling (e.g. RRCsignaling), for a transmission numerology and a carrier. In an example,in a resource grid, a resource unit identified by a subcarrier index anda symbol index may be a resource element 805. In an example, a subframemay comprise a first number of OFDM symbols 807 depending on anumerology associated with a carrier. For example, when a subcarrierspacing of a numerology of a carrier is 15 KHz, a subframe may have 14OFDM symbols for a carrier. When a subcarrier spacing of a numerology is30 KHz, a subframe may have 28 OFDM symbols. When a subcarrier spacingof a numerology is 60 Khz, a subframe may have 56 OFDM symbols, etc. Inan example, a second number of resource blocks comprised in a resourcegrid of a carrier may depend on a bandwidth and a numerology of thecarrier.

As shown in FIG. 8, a resource block 806 may comprise 12 subcarriers. Inan example, multiple resource blocks may be grouped into a ResourceBlock Group (RBG) 804. In an example, a size of an RBG may depend on atleast one of: an RRC message indicating an RBG size configuration; asize of a carrier bandwidth; or a size of a bandwidth part of a carrier.In an example, a carrier may comprise multiple bandwidth parts. A firstbandwidth part of a carrier may have different frequency location and/orbandwidth from a second bandwidth part of the carrier.

In an example, a gNB may transmit a downlink control informationcomprising a downlink or uplink resource block assignment to a wirelessdevice. A base station may transmit to or receive from, a wirelessdevice, data packets (e.g. transport blocks) scheduled and transmittedvia one or more resource blocks and one or more slots according toparameters in a downlink control information and/or RRC message(s). Inan example, a starting symbol relative to a first slot of the one ormore slots may be indicated to the wireless device. In an example, a gNBmay transmit to or receive from, a wireless device, data packetsscheduled on one or more RB Gs and one or more slots.

In an example, a gNB may transmit a downlink control informationcomprising a downlink assignment to a wireless device via one or morePDCCHs. The downlink assignment may comprise parameters indicating atleast modulation and coding format; resource allocation; and/or HARQinformation related to DL-SCH. In an example, a resource allocation maycomprise parameters of resource block allocation; and/or slotallocation. In an example, a gNB may dynamically allocate resources to awireless device via a Cell-Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI)on one or more PDCCHs. The wireless device may monitor the one or morePDCCHs in order to find possible allocation when its downlink receptionis enabled. The wireless device may receive one or more downlink datapackage on one or more PDSCH scheduled by the one or more PDCCHs, whensuccessfully detecting the one or more PDCCHs.

In an example, a gNB may allocate Configured Scheduling (CS) resourcesfor down link transmission to a wireless device. The base station maytransmit one or more RRC messages indicating a periodicity of the CSgrant. The base station may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH addressed to aConfigured Scheduling-RNTI (CS-RNTI) activating the CS resources. TheDCI may comprise parameters indicating that the downlink grant is a CSgrant. The CS grant may be implicitly reused according to theperiodicity defined by the one or more RRC messages, until deactivated.

In an example, a gNB may transmit a downlink control informationcomprising an uplink grant to a wireless device via one or more PDCCHs.The uplink grant may comprise parameters indicating at least modulationand coding format; resource allocation; and/or HARQ information relatedto UL-SCH. In an example, a resource allocation may comprise parametersof resource block allocation; and/or slot allocation. In an example, agNB may dynamically allocate resources to a wireless device via a C-RNTIon one or more PDCCHs. The wireless device may monitor the one or morePDCCHs in order to find possible resource allocation. The wirelessdevice may transmit one or more uplink data package via one or morePUSCH scheduled by the one or more PDCCHs, when successfully detectingthe one or more PDCCHs.

In an example, a gNB may allocate CS resources for uplink datatransmission to a wireless device. The base station may transmit one ormore RRC messages indicating a periodicity of the CS grant. The basestation may transmit a DCI via a PDCCH addressed to a CS-RNTI activatingthe CS resources. The DCI may comprise parameters indicating that theuplink grant is a CS grant. The CS grant may be implicitly reusedaccording to the periodicity defined by the one or more RRC message,until deactivated.

In an example, a base station may transmit DCI/control signaling viaPDCCH. The DCI may take a format in a plurality of formats. A DCI maycomprise downlink and/or uplink scheduling information (e.g., resourceallocation information, HARQ related parameters, MCS), request for CSI(e.g., aperiodic CQI reports), request for SRS, uplink power controlcommands for one or more cells, one or more timing information (e.g., TBtransmission/reception timing, HARQ feedback timing, etc.), etc. In anexample, a DCI may indicate an uplink grant comprising transmissionparameters for one or more transport blocks. In an example, a DCI mayindicate downlink assignment indicating parameters for receiving one ormore transport blocks. In an example, a DCI may be used by base stationto initiate a contention-free random access at the wireless device. Inan example, the base station may transmit a DCI comprising slot formatindicator (SFI) notifying a slot format. In an example, the base stationmay transmit a DCI comprising pre-emption indication notifying thePRB(s) and/or OFDM symbol(s) where a UE may assume no transmission isintended for the UE. In an example, the base station may transmit a DCIfor group power control of PUCCH or PUSCH or SRS. In an example, a DCImay correspond to an RNTI. In an example, the wireless device may obtainan RNTI in response to completing the initial access (e.g., C-RNTI). Inan example, the base station may configure an RNTI for the wireless(e.g., CS-RNTI, TPC-CS-RNTI, TPC-PUCCH-RNTI, TPC-PUSCH-RNTI,TPC-SRS-RNTI). In an example, the wireless device may compute an RNTI(e.g., the wireless device may compute RA-RNTI based on resources usedfor transmission of a preamble). In an example, an RNTI may have apre-configured value (e.g., P-RNTI or SI-RNTI). In an example, awireless device may monitor a group common search space which may beused by base station for transmitting DCIs that are intended for a groupof UEs. In an example, a group common DCI may correspond to an RNTIwhich is commonly configured for a group of UEs. In an example, awireless device may monitor a UE-specific search space. In an example, aUE specific DCI may correspond to an RNTI configured for the wirelessdevice.

A NR system may support a single beam operation and/or a multi-beamoperation. In a multi-beam operation, a base station may perform adownlink beam sweeping to provide coverage for common control channelsand/or downlink SS blocks, which may comprise at least a PSS, a SSS,and/or PBCH. A wireless device may measure quality of a beam pair linkusing one or more RS s. One or more SS blocks, or one or more CSI-RSresources, associated with a CSI-RS resource index (CRI), or one or moreDM-RSs of PBCH, may be used as RS for measuring quality of a beam pairlink. Quality of a beam pair link may be defined as a reference signalreceived power (RSRP) value, or a reference signal received quality(RSRQ) value, and/or a CSI value measured on RS resources. The basestation may indicate whether an RS resource, used for measuring a beampair link quality, is quasi-co-located (QCLed) with DM-RS s of a controlchannel. A RS resource and DM-RS s of a control channel may be calledQCLed when channel characteristics from a transmission on an RS to awireless device, and that from a transmission on a control channel to awireless device, are similar or same under a configured criterion. In amulti-beam operation, a wireless device may perform an uplink beamsweeping to access a cell.

In an example, a wireless device may be configured to monitor PDCCH onone or more beam pair links simultaneously depending on a capability ofa wireless device. This may increase robustness against beam pair linkblocking. A base station may transmit one or more messages to configurea wireless device to monitor PDCCH on one or more beam pair links indifferent PDCCH OFDM symbols. For example, a base station may transmithigher layer signaling (e.g. RRC signaling) or MAC CE comprisingparameters related to the Rx beam setting of a wireless device formonitoring PDCCH on one or more beam pair links. A base station maytransmit indication of spatial QCL assumption between an DL RS antennaport(s) (for example, cell-specific CSI-RS, or wireless device-specificCSI-RS, or SS block, or PBCH with or without DM-RS s of PBCH), and DL RSantenna port(s) for demodulation of DL control channel. Signaling forbeam indication for a PDCCH may be MAC CE signaling, or RRC signaling,or DCI signaling, or specification-transparent and/or implicit method,and combination of these signaling methods.

For reception of unicast DL data channel, a base station may indicatespatial QCL parameters between DL RS antenna port(s) and DM-RS antennaport(s) of DL data channel. The base station may transmit DCI (e.g.downlink grants) comprising information indicating the RS antennaport(s). The information may indicate RS antenna port(s) which may beQCL-ed with the DM-RS antenna port(s). Different set of DM-RS antennaport(s) for a DL data channel may be indicated as QCL with different setof the RS antenna port(s).

FIG. 9A is an example of beam sweeping in a DL channel. In anRRC_INACTIVE state or RRC_IDLE state, a wireless device may assume thatSS blocks form an SS burst 940, and an SS burst set 950. The SS burstset 950 may have a given periodicity. For example, in a multi-beamoperation, a base station 120 may transmit SS blocks in multiple beams,together forming a SS burst 940. One or more SS blocks may betransmitted on one beam. If multiple SS bursts 940 are transmitted withmultiple beams, SS bursts together may form SS burst set 950.

A wireless device may further use CSI-RS in the multi-beam operation forestimating a beam quality of a links between a wireless device and abase station. A beam may be associated with a CSI-RS. For example, awireless device may, based on a RSRP measurement on CSI-RS, report abeam index, as indicated in a CRI for downlink beam selection, andassociated with a RSRP value of a beam. A CSI-RS may be transmitted on aCSI-RS resource including at least one of one or more antenna ports, oneor more time or frequency radio resources. A CSI-RS resource may beconfigured in a cell-specific way by common RRC signaling, or in awireless device-specific way by dedicated RRC signaling, and/or L1/L2signaling. Multiple wireless devices covered by a cell may measure acell-specific CSI-RS resource. A dedicated subset of wireless devicescovered by a cell may measure a wireless device-specific CSI-RSresource.

A CSI-RS resource may be transmitted periodically, or using aperiodictransmission, or using a multi-shot or semi-persistent transmission. Forexample, in a periodic transmission in FIG. 9A, a base station 120 maytransmit configured CSI-RS resources 940 periodically using a configuredperiodicity in a time domain. In an aperiodic transmission, a configuredCSI-RS resource may be transmitted in a dedicated time slot. In amulti-shot or semi-persistent transmission, a configured CSI-RS resourcemay be transmitted within a configured period. Beams used for CSI-RStransmission may have different beam width than beams used for SS-blockstransmission.

FIG. 9B is an example of a beam management procedure in an example newradio network. A base station 120 and/or a wireless device 110 mayperform a downlink L1/L2 beam management procedure. One or more of thefollowing downlink L1/L2 beam management procedures may be performedwithin one or more wireless devices 110 and one or more base stations120. In an example, a P-1 procedure 910 may be used to enable thewireless device 110 to measure one or more Transmission (Tx) beamsassociated with the base station 120 to support a selection of a firstset of Tx beams associated with the base station 120 and a first set ofRx beam(s) associated with a wireless device 110. For beamforming at abase station 120, a base station 120 may sweep a set of different TXbeams. For beamforming at a wireless device 110, a wireless device 110may sweep a set of different Rx beams. In an example, a P-2 procedure920 may be used to enable a wireless device 110 to measure one or moreTx beams associated with a base station 120 to possibly change a firstset of Tx beams associated with a base station 120. A P-2 procedure 920may be performed on a possibly smaller set of beams for beam refinementthan in the P-1 procedure 910. A P-2 procedure 920 may be a special caseof a P-1 procedure 910. In an example, a P-3 procedure 930 may be usedto enable a wireless device 110 to measure at least one Tx beamassociated with a base station 120 to change a first set of Rx beamsassociated with a wireless device 110.

A wireless device 110 may transmit one or more beam management reportsto a base station 120. In one or more beam management reports, awireless device 110 may indicate some beam pair quality parameters,comprising at least, one or more beam identifications; RSRP; PrecodingMatrix Indicator (PMI)/Channel Quality Indicator (CQI)/Rank Indicator(RI) of a subset of configured beams. Based on one or more beammanagement reports, a base station 120 may transmit to a wireless device110 a signal indicating that one or more beam pair links are one or moreserving beams. A base station 120 may transmit PDCCH and PDSCH for awireless device 110 using one or more serving beams.

In an example embodiment, new radio network may support a BandwidthAdaptation (BA). In an example, receive and/or transmit bandwidthsconfigured by a UE employing a BA may not be large. For example, areceive and/or transmit bandwidths may not be as large as a bandwidth ofa cell. Receive and/or transmit bandwidths may be adjustable. Forexample, a UE may change receive and/or transmit bandwidths, e.g., toshrink during period of low activity to save power. For example, a UEmay change a location of receive and/or transmit bandwidths in afrequency domain, e.g. to increase scheduling flexibility. For example,a UE may change a subcarrier spacing, e.g. to allow different services.

In an example embodiment, a subset of a total cell bandwidth of a cellmay be referred to as a Bandwidth Part (BWP). A base station mayconfigure a UE with one or more BWPs to achieve a BA. For example, abase station may indicate, to a UE, which of the one or more(configured) BWPs is an active BWP.

FIG. 10 is an example diagram of 3 BWPs configured: BWP1 (1010 and 1050)with a width of 40 MHz and subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; BWP2 (1020 and1040) with a width of 10 MHz and subcarrier spacing of 15 kHz; BWP3 1030with a width of 20 MHz and subcarrier spacing of 60 kHz.

In an example, a UE, configured for operation in one or more BWPs of acell, may be configured by one or more higher layers (e.g. RRC layer)for a cell a set of one or more BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs) forreceptions by the UE (DL BWP set) in a DL bandwidth by at least oneparameter DL-BWP and a set of one or more BWPs (e.g., at most four BWPs)for transmissions by a UE (UL BWP set) in an UL bandwidth by at leastone parameter UL-BWP for a cell.

To enable BA on the PCell, a base station may configure a UE with one ormore UL and DL BWP pairs. To enable BA on SCells (e.g., in case of CA),a base station may configure a UE at least with one or more DL BWPs(e.g., there may be none in an UL).

In an example, an initial active DL BWP may be defined by at least oneof a location and number of contiguous PRBs, a subcarrier spacing, or acyclic prefix, for a control resource set for at least one common searchspace. For operation on the PCell, one or more higher layer parametersmay indicate at least one initial UL BWP for a random access procedure.If a UE is configured with a secondary carrier on a primary cell, the UEmay be configured with an initial BWP for random access procedure on asecondary carrier.

In an example, for unpaired spectrum operation, a UE may expect that acenter frequency for a DL BWP may be same as a center frequency for a ULBWP.

For example, for a DL BWP or an UL BWP in a set of one or more DL BWPsor one or more UL BWPs, respectively, a base statin may semi-staticallyconfigure a UE for a cell with one or more parameters indicating atleast one of following: a subcarrier spacing; a cyclic prefix; a numberof contiguous PRBs; an index in the set of one or more DL BWPs and/orone or more UL BWPs; a link between a DL BWP and an UL BWP from a set ofconfigured DL BWPs and UL BWPs; a DCI detection to a PDSCH receptiontiming; a PDSCH reception to a HARQ-ACK transmission timing value; a DCIdetection to a PUSCH transmission timing value; an offset of a first PRBof a DL bandwidth or an UL bandwidth, respectively, relative to a firstPRB of a bandwidth.

In an example, for a DL BWP in a set of one or more DL BWPs on a PCell,a base station may configure a UE with one or more control resource setsfor at least one type of common search space and/or one UE-specificsearch space. For example, a base station may not configure a UE withouta common search space on a PCell, or on a PSCell, in an active DL BWP.

For an UL BWP in a set of one or more UL BWPs, a base station mayconfigure a UE with one or more resource sets for one or more PUCCHtransmissions.

In an example, if a DCI comprises a BWP indicator field, a BWP indicatorfield value may indicate an active DL BWP, from a configured DL BWP set,for one or more DL receptions. If a DCI comprises a BWP indicator field,a BWP indicator field value may indicate an active UL BWP, from aconfigured UL BWP set, for one or more UL transmissions.

In an example, for a PCell, a base station may semi-statically configurea UE with a default DL BWP among configured DL BWPs. If a UE is notprovided a default DL BWP, a default BWP may be an initial active DLBWP.

In an example, a base station may configure a UE with a timer value fora PCell. For example, a UE may start a timer, referred to as BWPinactivity timer, when a UE detects a DCI indicating an active DL BWP,other than a default DL BWP, for a paired spectrum operation or when aUE detects a DCI indicating an active DL BWP or UL BWP, other than adefault DL BWP or UL BWP, for an unpaired spectrum operation. The UE mayincrement the timer by an interval of a first value (e.g., the firstvalue may be 1 millisecond or 0.5 milliseconds) if the UE does notdetect a DCI during the interval for a paired spectrum operation or foran unpaired spectrum operation. In an example, the timer may expire whenthe timer is equal to the timer value. A UE may switch to the default DLBWP from an active DL BWP when the timer expires.

In an example, a base station may semi-statically configure a UE withone or more BWPs. A UE may switch an active BWP from a first BWP to asecond BWP in response to receiving a DCI indicating the second BWP asan active BWP and/or in response to an expiry of BWP inactivity timer(for example, the second BWP may be a default BWP). For example, FIG. 10is an example diagram of 3 BWPs configured, BWP1 (1010 and 1050), BWP2(1020 and 1040), and BWP3 (1030). BWP2 (1020 and 1040) may be a defaultBWP. BWP1 (1010) may be an initial active BWP. In an example, a UE mayswitch an active BWP from BWP1 1010 to BWP2 1020 in response to anexpiry of BWP inactivity timer. For example, a UE may switch an activeBWP from BWP2 1020 to BWP3 1030 in response to receiving a DCIindicating BWP3 1030 as an active BWP. Switching an active BWP from BWP31030 to BWP2 1040 and/or from BWP2 1040 to BWP1 1050 may be in responseto receiving a DCI indicating an active BWP and/or in response to anexpiry of BWP inactivity timer.

In an example, if a UE is configured for a secondary cell with a defaultDL BWP among configured DL BWPs and a timer value, UE procedures on asecondary cell may be same as on a primary cell using the timer valuefor the secondary cell and the default DL BWP for the secondary cell.

In an example, if a base station configures a UE with a first active DLBWP and a first active UL BWP on a secondary cell or carrier, a UE mayemploy an indicated DL BWP and an indicated UL BWP on a secondary cellas a respective first active DL BWP and first active UL BWP on asecondary cell or carrier.

FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B show packet flows employing a multi connectivity(e.g. dual connectivity, multi connectivity, tight interworking, and/orthe like). FIG. 11A is an example diagram of a protocol structure of awireless device 110 (e.g. UE) with CA and/or multi connectivity as peran aspect of an embodiment. FIG. 11B is an example diagram of a protocolstructure of multiple base stations with CA and/or multi connectivity asper an aspect of an embodiment. The multiple base stations may comprisea master node, MN 1130 (e.g. a master node, a master base station, amaster gNB, a master eNB, and/or the like) and a secondary node, SN 1150(e.g. a secondary node, a secondary base station, a secondary gNB, asecondary eNB, and/or the like). A master node 1130 and a secondary node1150 may co-work to communicate with a wireless device 110.

When multi connectivity is configured for a wireless device 110, thewireless device 110, which may support multiple reception/transmissionfunctions in an RRC connected state, may be configured to utilize radioresources provided by multiple schedulers of a multiple base stations.Multiple base stations may be inter-connected via a non-ideal or idealbackhaul (e.g. Xn interface, X2 interface, and/or the like). A basestation involved in multi connectivity for a certain wireless device mayperform at least one of two different roles: a base station may eitheract as a master base station or as a secondary base station. In multiconnectivity, a wireless device may be connected to one master basestation and one or more secondary base stations. In an example, a masterbase station (e.g. the MN 1130) may provide a master cell group (MCG)comprising a primary cell and/or one or more secondary cells for awireless device (e.g. the wireless device 110). A secondary base station(e.g. the SN 1150) may provide a secondary cell group (SCG) comprising aprimary secondary cell (PSCell) and/or one or more secondary cells for awireless device (e.g. the wireless device 110).

In multi connectivity, a radio protocol architecture that a beareremploys may depend on how a bearer is setup. In an example, threedifferent type of bearer setup options may be supported: an MCG bearer,an SCG bearer, and/or a split bearer. A wireless device mayreceive/transmit packets of an MCG bearer via one or more cells of theMCG, and/or may receive/transmits packets of an SCG bearer via one ormore cells of an SCG. Multi-connectivity may also be described as havingat least one bearer configured to use radio resources provided by thesecondary base station. Multi-connectivity may or may not beconfigured/implemented in some of the example embodiments.

In an example, a wireless device (e.g. Wireless Device 110) may transmitand/or receive: packets of an MCG bearer via an SDAP layer (e.g. SDAP1110), a PDCP layer (e.g. NR PDCP 1111), an RLC layer (e.g. MN RLC1114), and a MAC layer (e.g. MN MAC 1118); packets of a split bearer viaan SDAP layer (e.g. SDAP 1110), a PDCP layer (e.g. NR PDCP 1112), one ofa master or secondary RLC layer (e.g. MN RLC 1115, SN RLC 1116), and oneof a master or secondary MAC layer (e.g. MN MAC 1118, SN MAC 1119);and/or packets of an SCG bearer via an SDAP layer (e.g. SDAP 1110), aPDCP layer (e.g. NR PDCP 1113), an RLC layer (e.g. SN RLC 1117), and aMAC layer (e.g. MN MAC 1119).

In an example, a master base station (e.g. MN 1130) and/or a secondarybase station (e.g. SN 1150) may transmit/receive: packets of an MCGbearer via a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g. SDAP 1120, SDAP1140), a master or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g. NR PDCP 1121, NR PDCP1142), a master node RLC layer (e.g. MN RLC 1124, MN RLC 1125), and amaster node MAC layer (e.g. MN MAC 1128); packets of an SCG bearer via amaster or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g. SDAP 1120, SDAP 1140), amaster or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g. NR PDCP 1122, NR PDCP 1143), asecondary node RLC layer (e.g. SN RLC 1146, SN RLC 1147), and asecondary node MAC layer (e.g. SN MAC 1148); packets of a split bearervia a master or secondary node SDAP layer (e.g. SDAP 1120, SDAP 1140), amaster or secondary node PDCP layer (e.g. NR PDCP 1123, NR PDCP 1141), amaster or secondary node RLC layer (e.g. MN RLC 1126, SN RLC 1144, SNRLC 1145, MN RLC 1127), and a master or secondary node MAC layer (e.g.MN MAC 1128, SN MAC 1148).

In multi connectivity, a wireless device may configure multiple MACentities: one MAC entity (e.g. MN MAC 1118) for a master base station,and other MAC entities (e.g. SN MAC 1119) for a secondary base station.In multi-connectivity, a configured set of serving cells for a wirelessdevice may comprise two subsets: an MCG comprising serving cells of amaster base station, and SCGs comprising serving cells of a secondarybase station. For an SCG, one or more of following configurations may beapplied: at least one cell of an SCG has a configured UL CC and at leastone cell of a SCG, named as primary secondary cell (PSCell, PCell ofSCG, or sometimes called PCell), is configured with PUCCH resources;when an SCG is configured, there may be at least one SCG bearer or oneSplit bearer; upon detection of a physical layer problem or a randomaccess problem on a PSCell, or a number of NR RLC retransmissions hasbeen reached associated with the SCG, or upon detection of an accessproblem on a PSCell during a SCG addition or a SCG change: an RRCconnection re-establishment procedure may not be triggered, ULtransmissions towards cells of an SCG may be stopped, a master basestation may be informed by a wireless device of a SCG failure type, forsplit bearer, a DL data transfer over a master base station may bemaintained; an NR RLC acknowledged mode (AM) bearer may be configuredfor a split bearer; PCell and/or PSCell may not be de-activated; PSCellmay be changed with a SCG change procedure (e.g. with security keychange and a RACH procedure); and/or a bearer type change between asplit bearer and a SCG bearer or simultaneous configuration of a SCG anda split bearer may or may not supported.

With respect to interaction between a master base station and asecondary base stations for multi-connectivity, one or more of thefollowing may be applied: a master base station and/or a secondary basestation may maintain RRM measurement configurations of a wirelessdevice; a master base station may (e.g. based on received measurementreports, traffic conditions, and/or bearer types) may decide to requesta secondary base station to provide additional resources (e.g. servingcells) for a wireless device; upon receiving a request from a masterbase station, a secondary base station may create/modify a containerthat may result in configuration of additional serving cells for awireless device (or decide that the secondary base station has noresource available to do so); for a UE capability coordination, a masterbase station may provide (a part of) an AS configuration and UEcapabilities to a secondary base station; a master base station and asecondary base station may exchange information about a UE configurationby employing of RRC containers (inter-node messages) carried via Xnmessages; a secondary base station may initiate a reconfiguration of thesecondary base station existing serving cells (e.g. PUCCH towards thesecondary base station); a secondary base station may decide which cellis a PSCell within a SCG; a master base station may or may not changecontent of RRC configurations provided by a secondary base station; incase of a SCG addition and/or a SCG SCell addition, a master basestation may provide recent (or the latest) measurement results for SCGcell(s); a master base station and secondary base stations may receiveinformation of SFN and/or subframe offset of each other from OAM and/orvia an Xn interface, (e.g. for a purpose of DRX alignment and/oridentification of a measurement gap). In an example, when adding a newSCG SCell, dedicated RRC signaling may be used for sending requiredsystem information of a cell as for CA, except for an SFN acquired froma MIB of a PSCell of a SCG.

FIG. 12 is an example diagram of a random access procedure. One or moreevents may trigger a random access procedure. For example, one or moreevents may be at least one of following: initial access from RRC_IDLE,RRC connection re-establishment procedure, handover, DL or UL dataarrival during RRC_CONNECTED when UL synchronization status isnon-synchronized, transition from RRC_Inactive, and/or request for othersystem information. For example, a PDCCH order, a MAC entity, and/or abeam failure indication may initiate a random access procedure.

In an example embodiment, a random access procedure may be at least oneof a contention based random access procedure and a contention freerandom access procedure. For example, a contention based random accessprocedure may comprise, one or more Msg 1 1220 transmissions, one ormore Msg2 1230 transmissions, one or more Msg3 1240 transmissions, andcontention resolution 1250. For example, a contention free random accessprocedure may comprise one or more Msg 1 1220 transmissions and one ormore Msg2 1230 transmissions.

In an example, a base station may transmit (e.g., unicast, multicast, orbroadcast), to a UE, a RACH configuration 1210 via one or more beams.The RACH configuration 1210 may comprise one or more parametersindicating at least one of following: available set of PRACH resourcesfor a transmission of a random access preamble, initial preamble power(e.g., random access preamble initial received target power), an RSRPthreshold for a selection of a SS block and corresponding PRACHresource, a power-ramping factor (e.g., random access preamble powerramping step), random access preamble index, a maximum number ofpreamble transmission, preamble group A and group B, a threshold (e.g.,message size) to determine the groups of random access preambles, a setof one or more random access preambles for system information requestand corresponding PRACH resource(s), if any, a set of one or more randomaccess preambles for beam failure recovery request and correspondingPRACH resource(s), if any, a time window to monitor random accessresponse(s) (RARs), a time window to monitor response(s) on beam failurerecovery request, and/or a contention resolution timer.

In an example, the Msg1 1220 may be one or more transmissions of arandom access preamble. For a contention based random access procedure,a UE may select a SS block with a RSRP above the RSRP threshold. Ifrandom access preambles group B exists, a UE may select one or morerandom access preambles from a group A or a group B depending on apotential Msg3 1240 size. If a random access preambles group B does notexist, a UE may select the one or more random access preambles from agroup A. A UE may select a random access preamble index randomly (e.g.with equal probability or a normal distribution) from one or more randomaccess preambles associated with a selected group. If a base stationsemi-statically configures a UE with an association between randomaccess preambles and SS blocks, the UE may select a random accesspreamble index randomly with equal probability from one or more randomaccess preambles associated with a selected SS block and a selectedgroup.

For example, a UE may initiate a contention free random access procedurebased on a beam failure indication from a lower layer. For example, abase station may semi-statically configure a UE with one or morecontention free PRACH resources for beam failure recovery requestassociated with at least one of SS blocks and/or CSI-RS s. If at leastone of SS blocks with a RSRP above a first RSRP threshold amongstassociated SS blocks or at least one of CSI-RSs with a RSRP above asecond RSRP threshold amongst associated CSI-RSs is available, a UE mayselect a random access preamble index corresponding to a selected SSblock or CSI-RS from a set of one or more random access preambles forbeam failure recovery request.

For example, a UE may receive, from a base station, a random accesspreamble index via PDCCH or RRC for a contention free random accessprocedure. If a base station does not configure a UE with at least onecontention free PRACH resource associated with SS blocks or CSI-RS, theUE may select a random access preamble index. If a base stationconfigures a UE with one or more contention free PRACH resourcesassociated with SS blocks and at least one SS block with a RSRP above afirst RSRP threshold amongst associated SS blocks is available, the UEmay select the at least one SS block and select a random access preamblecorresponding to the at least one SS block. If a base station configuresa UE with one or more contention free PRACH resources associated withCSI-RS s and at least one CSI-RS with a RSRP above a second RSPRthreshold amongst the associated CSI-RS s is available, the UE mayselect the at least one CSI-RS and select a random access preamblecorresponding to the at least one CSI-RS.

A UE may perform one or more Msg1 1220 transmissions by transmitting theselected random access preamble. For example, if a UE selects an SSblock and is configured with an association between one or more PRACHoccasions and one or more SS blocks, the UE may determine an PRACHoccasion from one or more PRACH occasions corresponding to a selected SSblock. For example, if a UE selects a CSI-RS and is configured with anassociation between one or more PRACH occasions and one or more CSI-RSs, the UE may determine a PRACH occasion from one or more PRACHoccasions corresponding to a selected CSI-RS. A UE may transmit, to abase station, a selected random access preamble via a selected PRACHoccasions. A UE may determine a transmit power for a transmission of aselected random access preamble at least based on an initial preamblepower and a power-ramping factor. A UE may determine a RA-RNTIassociated with a selected PRACH occasions in which a selected randomaccess preamble is transmitted. For example, a UE may not determine aRA-RNTI for a beam failure recovery request. A UE may determine anRA-RNTI at least based on an index of a first OFDM symbol and an indexof a first slot of a selected PRACH occasions, and/or an uplink carrierindex for a transmission of Msg1 1220.

In an example, a UE may receive, from a base station, a random accessresponse, Msg 2 1230. A UE may start a time window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor a random access response. For beam failurerecovery request, a base station may configure a UE with a differenttime window (e.g., bfr-ResponseWindow) to monitor response on beamfailure recovery request. For example, a UE may start a time window(e.g., ra-ResponseWindow or bfr-ResponseWindow) at a start of a firstPDCCH occasion after a fixed duration of one or more symbols from an endof a preamble transmission. If a UE transmits multiple preambles, the UEmay start a time window at a start of a first PDCCH occasion after afixed duration of one or more symbols from an end of a first preambletransmission. A UE may monitor a PDCCH of a cell for at least one randomaccess response identified by a RA-RNTI or for at least one response tobeam failure recovery request identified by a C-RNTI while a timer for atime window is running.

In an example, a UE may consider a reception of random access responsesuccessful if at least one random access response comprises a randomaccess preamble identifier corresponding to a random access preambletransmitted by the UE. A UE may consider the contention free randomaccess procedure successfully completed if a reception of random accessresponse is successful. If a contention free random access procedure istriggered for a beam failure recovery request, a UE may consider acontention free random access procedure successfully complete if a PDCCHtransmission is addressed to a C-RNTI. In an example, if at least onerandom access response comprises a random access preamble identifier, aUE may consider the random access procedure successfully completed andmay indicate a reception of an acknowledgement for a system informationrequest to upper layers. If a UE has signaled multiple preambletransmissions, the UE may stop transmitting remaining preambles (if any)in response to a successful reception of a corresponding random accessresponse.

In an example, a UE may perform one or more Msg 3 1240 transmissions inresponse to a successful reception of random access response (e.g., fora contention based random access procedure). A UE may adjust an uplinktransmission timing based on a timing advanced command indicated by arandom access response and may transmit one or more transport blocksbased on an uplink grant indicated by a random access response.Subcarrier spacing for PUSCH transmission for Msg3 1240 may be providedby at least one higher layer (e.g. RRC) parameter. A UE may transmit arandom access preamble via PRACH and Msg3 1240 via PUSCH on a same cell.A base station may indicate an UL BWP for a PUSCH transmission of Msg31240 via system information block. A UE may employ HARQ for aretransmission of Msg 3 1240.

In an example, multiple UEs may perform Msg 1 1220 by transmitting asame preamble to a base station and receive, from the base station, asame random access response comprising an identity (e.g., TC-RNTI).Contention resolution 1250 may ensure that a UE does not incorrectly usean identity of another UE. For example, contention resolution 1250 maybe based on C-RNTI on PDCCH or a UE contention resolution identity onDL-SCH. For example, if a base station assigns a C-RNTI to a UE, the UEmay perform contention resolution 1250 based on a reception of a PDCCHtransmission that is addressed to the C-RNTI. In response to detectionof a C-RNTI on a PDCCH, a UE may consider contention resolution 1250successful and may consider a random access procedure successfullycompleted. If a UE has no valid C-RNTI, a contention resolution may beaddressed by employing a TC-RNTI. For example, if a MAC PDU issuccessfully decoded and a MAC PDU comprises a UE contention resolutionidentity MAC CE that matches the CCCH SDU transmitted in Msg3 1250, a UEmay consider the contention resolution 1250 successful and may considerthe random access procedure successfully completed.

FIG. 13 is an example structure for MAC entities as per an aspect of anembodiment. In an example, a wireless device may be configured tooperate in a multi-connectivity mode. A wireless device in RRC_CONNECTEDwith multiple RX/TX may be configured to utilize radio resourcesprovided by multiple schedulers located in a plurality of base stations.The plurality of base stations may be connected via a non-ideal or idealbackhaul over the Xn interface. In an example, a base station in aplurality of base stations may act as a master base station or as asecondary base station. A wireless device may be connected to one masterbase station and one or more secondary base stations. A wireless devicemay be configured with multiple MAC entities, e.g. one MAC entity formaster base station, and one or more other MAC entities for secondarybase station(s). In an example, a configured set of serving cells for awireless device may comprise two subsets: an MCG comprising servingcells of a master base station, and one or more SCGs comprising servingcells of a secondary base station(s). FIG. 13 illustrates an examplestructure for MAC entities when MCG and SCG are configured for awireless device.

In an example, at least one cell in a SCG may have a configured UL CC,wherein a cell of at least one cell may be called PSCell or PCell ofSCG, or sometimes may be simply called PCell. A PSCell may be configuredwith PUCCH resources. In an example, when a SCG is configured, there maybe at least one SCG bearer or one split bearer. In an example, upondetection of a physical layer problem or a random access problem on aPSCell, or upon reaching a number of RLC retransmissions associated withthe SCG, or upon detection of an access problem on a PSCell during a SCGaddition or a SCG change: an RRC connection re-establishment proceduremay not be triggered, UL transmissions towards cells of an SCG may bestopped, a master base station may be informed by a UE of a SCG failuretype and DL data transfer over a master base station may be maintained.

In an example, a MAC sublayer may provide services such as data transferand radio resource allocation to upper layers (e.g. 1310 or 1320). A MACsublayer may comprise a plurality of MAC entities (e.g. 1350 and 1360).A MAC sublayer may provide data transfer services on logical channels.To accommodate different kinds of data transfer services, multiple typesof logical channels may be defined. A logical channel may supporttransfer of a particular type of information. A logical channel type maybe defined by what type of information (e.g., control or data) istransferred. For example, BCCH, PCCH, CCCH and DCCH may be controlchannels and DTCH may be a traffic channel. In an example, a first MACentity (e.g. 1310) may provide services on PCCH, BCCH, CCCH, DCCH, DTCHand MAC control elements. In an example, a second MAC entity (e.g. 1320)may provide services on BCCH, DCCH, DTCH and MAC control elements.

A MAC sublayer may expect from a physical layer (e.g. 1330 or 1340)services such as data transfer services, signaling of HARQ feedback,signaling of scheduling request or measurements (e.g. CQI). In anexample, in dual connectivity, two MAC entities may be configured for awireless device: one for MCG and one for SCG. A MAC entity of wirelessdevice may handle a plurality of transport channels. In an example, afirst MAC entity may handle first transport channels comprising a PCCHof MCG, a first BCH of MCG, one or more first DL-SCHs of MCG, one ormore first UL-SCHs of MCG and one or more first RACHs of MCG. In anexample, a second MAC entity may handle second transport channelscomprising a second BCH of SCG, one or more second DL-SCHs of SCG, oneor more second UL-SCHs of SCG and one or more second RACHs of SCG.

In an example, if a MAC entity is configured with one or more SCells,there may be multiple DL-SCHs and there may be multiple UL-SCHs as wellas multiple RACHs per MAC entity. In an example, there may be one DL-SCHand UL-SCH on a SpCell. In an example, there may be one DL-SCH, zero orone UL-SCH and zero or one RACH for an SCell. A DL-SCH may supportreceptions using different numerologies and/or TTI duration within a MACentity. A UL-SCH may also support transmissions using differentnumerologies and/or TTI duration within the MAC entity.

In an example, a MAC sublayer may support different functions and maycontrol these functions with a control (e.g. 1355 or 1365) element.Functions performed by a MAC entity may comprise mapping between logicalchannels and transport channels (e.g., in uplink or downlink),multiplexing (e.g. 1352 or 1362) of MAC SDUs from one or differentlogical channels onto transport blocks (TB) to be delivered to thephysical layer on transport channels (e.g., in uplink), demultiplexing(e.g. 1352 or 1362) of MAC SDUs to one or different logical channelsfrom transport blocks (TB) delivered from the physical layer ontransport channels (e.g., in downlink), scheduling information reporting(e.g., in uplink), error correction through HARQ in uplink or downlink(e.g. 1363), and logical channel prioritization in uplink (e.g. 1351 or1361). A MAC entity may handle a random access process (e.g. 1354 or1364).

FIG. 14 is an example diagram of a RAN architecture comprising one ormore base stations. In an example, a protocol stack (e.g. RRC, SDAP,PDCP, RLC, MAC, and PHY) may be supported at a node. A base station(e.g. 120A or 120B) may comprise a base station central unit (CU) (e.g.gNB-CU 1420A or 1420B) and at least one base station distributed unit(DU) (e.g. gNB-DU 1430A, 1430B, 1430C, or 1430D) if a functional splitis configured. Upper protocol layers of a base station may be located ina base station CU, and lower layers of the base station may be locatedin the base station DUs. An F1 interface (e.g. CU-DU interface)connecting a base station CU and base station DUs may be an ideal ornon-ideal backhaul. F1-C may provide a control plane connection over anF1 interface, and F1-U may provide a user plane connection over the F1interface. In an example, an Xn interface may be configured between basestation CUs.

In an example, a base station CU may comprise an RRC function, an SDAPlayer, and a PDCP layer, and base station DUs may comprise an RLC layer,a MAC layer, and a PHY layer. In an example, various functional splitoptions between a base station CU and base station DUs may be possibleby locating different combinations of upper protocol layers (RANfunctions) in a base station CU and different combinations of lowerprotocol layers (RAN functions) in base station DUs. A functional splitmay support flexibility to move protocol layers between a base stationCU and base station DUs depending on service requirements and/or networkenvironments.

In an example, functional split options may be configured per basestation, per base station CU, per base station DU, per UE, per bearer,per slice, or with other granularities. In per base station CU split, abase station CU may have a fixed split option, and base station DUs maybe configured to match a split option of a base station CU. In per basestation DU split, a base station DU may be configured with a differentsplit option, and a base station CU may provide different split optionsfor different base station DUs. In per UE split, a base station (basestation CU and at least one base station DUs) may provide differentsplit options for different wireless devices. In per bearer split,different split options may be utilized for different bearers. In perslice splice, different split options may be applied for differentslices.

FIG. 15 is an example diagram showing RRC state transitions of awireless device. In an example, a wireless device may be in at least oneRRC state among an RRC connected state (e.g. RRC Connected 1530, RRCConnected), an RRC idle state (e.g. RRC Idle 1510, RRC_Idle), and/or anRRC inactive state (e.g. RRC Inactive 1520, RRC_Inactive). In anexample, in an RRC connected state, a wireless device may have at leastone RRC connection with at least one base station (e.g. gNB and/or eNB),which may have a UE context of the wireless device. A UE context (e.g. awireless device context) may comprise at least one of an access stratumcontext, one or more radio link configuration parameters, bearer (e.g.data radio bearer (DRB), signaling radio bearer (SRB), logical channel,QoS flow, PDU session, and/or the like) configuration information,security information, PHY/MAC/RLC/PDCP/SDAP layer configurationinformation, and/or the like configuration information for a wirelessdevice. In an example, in an RRC idle state, a wireless device may nothave an RRC connection with a base station, and a UE context of awireless device may not be stored in a base station. In an example, inan RRC inactive state, a wireless device may not have an RRC connectionwith a base station. A UE context of a wireless device may be stored ina base station, which may be called as an anchor base station (e.g. lastserving base station).

In an example, a wireless device may transition a UE RRC state betweenan RRC idle state and an RRC connected state in both ways (e.g.connection release 1540 or connection establishment 1550; or connectionreestablishment) and/or between an RRC inactive state and an RRCconnected state in both ways (e.g. connection inactivation 1570 orconnection resume 1580). In an example, a wireless device may transitionits RRC state from an RRC inactive state to an RRC idle state (e.g.connection release 1560).

In an example, an anchor base station may be a base station that maykeep a UE context (a wireless device context) of a wireless device atleast during a time period that a wireless device stays in a RANnotification area (RNA) of an anchor base station, and/or that awireless device stays in an RRC inactive state. In an example, an anchorbase station may be a base station that a wireless device in an RRCinactive state was lastly connected to in a latest RRC connected stateor that a wireless device lastly performed an RNA update procedure in.In an example, an RNA may comprise one or more cells operated by one ormore base stations. In an example, a base station may belong to one ormore RNAs. In an example, a cell may belong to one or more RNAs.

In an example, a wireless device may transition a UE RRC state from anRRC connected state to an RRC inactive state in a base station. Awireless device may receive RNA information from the base station. RNAinformation may comprise at least one of an RNA identifier, one or morecell identifiers of one or more cells of an RNA, a base stationidentifier, an IP address of the base station, an AS context identifierof the wireless device, a resume identifier, and/or the like.

In an example, an anchor base station may broadcast a message (e.g. RANpaging message) to base stations of an RNA to reach to a wireless devicein an RRC inactive state, and/or the base stations receiving the messagefrom the anchor base station may broadcast and/or multicast anothermessage (e.g. paging message) to wireless devices in their coveragearea, cell coverage area, and/or beam coverage area associated with theRNA through an air interface.

In an example, when a wireless device in an RRC inactive state movesinto a new RNA, the wireless device may perform an RNA update (RNAU)procedure, which may comprise a random access procedure by the wirelessdevice and/or a UE context retrieve procedure. A UE context retrieve maycomprise: receiving, by a base station from a wireless device, a randomaccess preamble; and fetching, by a base station, a UE context of thewireless device from an old anchor base station. Fetching may comprise:sending a retrieve UE context request message comprising a resumeidentifier to the old anchor base station and receiving a retrieve UEcontext response message comprising the UE context of the wirelessdevice from the old anchor base station.

In an example embodiment, a wireless device in an RRC inactive state mayselect a cell to camp on based on at least a on measurement results forone or more cells, a cell where a wireless device may monitor an RNApaging message and/or a core network paging message from a base station.In an example, a wireless device in an RRC inactive state may select acell to perform a random access procedure to resume an RRC connectionand/or to transmit one or more packets to a base station (e.g. to anetwork). In an example, if a cell selected belongs to a different RNAfrom an RNA for a wireless device in an RRC inactive state, the wirelessdevice may initiate a random access procedure to perform an RNA updateprocedure. In an example, if a wireless device in an RRC inactive statehas one or more packets, in a buffer, to transmit to a network, thewireless device may initiate a random access procedure to transmit oneor more packets to a base station of a cell that the wireless deviceselects. A random access procedure may be performed with two messages(e.g. 2 stage random access) and/or four messages (e.g. 4 stage randomaccess) between the wireless device and the base station.

In an example embodiment, a base station receiving one or more uplinkpackets from a wireless device in an RRC inactive state may fetch a UEcontext of a wireless device by transmitting a retrieve UE contextrequest message for the wireless device to an anchor base station of thewireless device based on at least one of an AS context identifier, anRNA identifier, a base station identifier, a resume identifier, and/or acell identifier received from the wireless device. In response tofetching a UE context, a base station may transmit a path switch requestfor a wireless device to a core network entity (e.g. AMF, MME, and/orthe like). A core network entity may update a downlink tunnel endpointidentifier for one or more bearers established for the wireless devicebetween a user plane core network entity (e.g. UPF, S-GW, and/or thelike) and a RAN node (e.g. the base station), e.g. changing a downlinktunnel endpoint identifier from an address of the anchor base station toan address of the base station.

A wireless device may initiate a random access (RA) procedure on a cellto establish communications to a base station. A four-step RA procedurein FIG. 12 may have an associated latency, e.g., which may be a minimumof fourteen transmission time intervals (TTI). As an example, 3GPP TR38.804 v14.0.0 indicates a minimum latency of fourteen TTIs comprising,e.g., 3 TTIs after a message from step 1 (e.g., Msg1 1220) of afour-step RA procedure, 1 TTI for a message from step 2 (e.g., Msg21230) of a four-step RA procedure, 5 TTIs after the message from step 2,1 TTI for a message from step 3 (e.g., Msg 3 1240) of a four-step RAprocedure, 3 TTIs after the message from step 3, and 1 TTI for a messagefrom step 4 (e.g., contention Resolution 1250) of a four-step procedure(e.g., 3+1+5+1+3+1=14). Reducing the number of steps in an RA proceduremay reduce latency. By using parallel transmissions, a four-step RAprocedure may be reduced to a two-step RA procedure. A two-step RAprocedure may have an associated latency, e.g., which may be a minimumof four TTIs and which may be less than an associated latency for afour-step RA procedure. As an example, 3GPP TR 38.804 v14.0.0 indicatesa minimum latency of four TTIs comprising, e.g., 3 TTIs after a messagefrom step 1 of a two-step RA procedure and 1 TTI for a message from step2 of a two-step RA procedure.

FIG. 16 is an example of a two-step RA procedure that may comprise anuplink (UL) transmission of a two-step Msg1 1620 that may comprise arandom access preamble (RAP) transmission 1630 and one or more transportblocks transmission 1640, followed by a downlink (DL) transmission of atwo-step Msg2 1650 that may comprise a response, e.g., random accessresponse (RAR), corresponding to the uplink transmission. The responsemay comprise contention resolution information. For example, thetwo-step Msg1 1620 may be also referred to as a message A (MsgA). Forexample, the two-step Msg2 1650 may be also referred to as a message B(MsgB).

A base station may transmit one or more RRC messages to configure awireless device with one or more parameters of two step RACHconfiguration 1610. The one or more RRC messages may broadcast,multicast, and/or unicast to a wireless device. The one or more RRCmessages may be wireless device-specific messages, e.g., a dedicated RRCmessage transmitted to a wireless device with RRC_INACTIVE 1520 orRRC_CONNECTED 1530. The one or more RRC messages may comprise parametersrequired for transmitting a two-step Msg1 (Msg A) 1620. For example, theparameter may indicate at least one of following: PRACH resourceallocation, preamble format, SSB information (e.g., total number ofSSBs, downlink resource allocation of SSB transmission, transmissionpower of SSB transmission, uplink radio resources (time-frequency radioresource, DMRS, MCS, etc.) for one or more transport blocktransmissions, and/or association between PRACH resource allocation andthe uplink radio resources (or associations between the uplink radioresources and downlink reference signals).

In the UL transmission (e.g., two step Msg 1 (Msg A) 1620) of a two-stepRA procedure, a wireless device may transmit, via a cell and to a basestation, at least one RAP and/or one or more transport blocks (e.g.,delay-sensitive data, wireless device ID, security information, deviceinformation such as IMSI/TMSI, and/or other information). In the DLtransmission of the two-step RA procedure, a base station may transmit atwo-step Msg2 (Msg B) 1650 (e.g., an RAR) that may comprise at least oneof following: a timing advance command indicating the TA value, a powercontrol command, an UL grant (e.g., radio resource assignment, and/orMCS), a wireless device ID for contention resolution, an RNTI (e.g.,C-RNTI or TC-RNTI), and/or other information. The two-step Msg2 (Msg B)1650 (e.g., an RAR) may comprise a preamble identifier corresponding tothe preamble 1630, a positive or negative acknowledgement of a receptionof the one or more transport blocks 1640, and/or an indication of asuccessful decoding of the one or more transport blocks 1640.

For example, a wireless device initiating two step RA procedure maytransmit Msg A comprising at least one preamble and at least onetransport block. The at least one transport block may comprise anidentifier that the wireless device uses for a contention resolution.For example, the identifier is a C-RNTI (e.g., for a wireless devicewith RRC Connected). For example, the identifier is a random number thatthe wireless device generates (e.g., for a wireless device not assignedwith C-RNTI). For example, the identifier is generated based on asubscriber information of the wireless device (e.g., T-IMSI). Thewireless device may start to monitor a downlink control channel (e.g. asearch space configured in PDCCH) for Msg B, (e.g., an RAR)corresponding to the Msg A, e.g., after or in response to transmittingthe Msg A. The Msg B may be scrambled by an RNTI calculated based on atleast one of following: a time resource index (e.g., an index of a firstOFDM symbol of and/or an index of a first slot) of PRACH occasion thatthe at least one preamble is transmitted, a frequency resource index ofPRACH occasion that the at least one preamble is transmitted, a timeresource index (e.g., an index of a first OFDM symbol of and/or an indexof a first slot) PUSCH occasion that the at least one transport block istransmitted, a frequency resource index of PUSCH occasion that the atleast one transport block is transmitted, an indicator (e.g., 0 or 1) ofan uplink carrier where the Msg A is transmitted. When the wirelessdevice receives the Msg B, the wireless device may consider (ordetermine) that the two step RA procedure is successfully completedbased on one or more conditions. For example, the one or more conditionsmay comprise the Msg B comprising a preamble index matched to the atleast one preamble that the wireless device transmits to the basestation. For example, the one or more conditions may comprise the Msg Bcomprising a contention resolution identifier matched to the identifierthat the wireless device transmits to the base station for thecontention resolution. In an example, the wireless device may receivethe Msg B indicating a retransmission of the at least one transportblock. For example, the Msg B indicating a retransmission of the atleast one transport block comprises an UL grant for the retransmission.A two-step RA procedure may reduce RA latency compared with a four-stepRA procedure, e.g., by integrating a random access preamble transmission(e.g., a process to obtain a timing advance value) with one or moretransport block transmissions.

In the UL transmission of a two-step RA procedure, a wireless device maytransmit, via a cell and to a base station, at least one RAP and one ormore TB s. The wireless device may acquire one or more configurationparameters for the UL transmission before the wireless device starts atwo-step RA procedure, e.g., at step 1610 in FIG. 16. For example, theone or more configuration parameters may indicate at least one offollowing: PRACH resource allocation, preamble format, SSB information(e.g., a number of transmitting SSBs, downlink resource allocation ofSSB transmissions, transmission power of SSB transmission, and/or otherinformation), uplink radio resources (in terms of time, frequency,code/sequence/signature) for one or more transport block transmissions,and power control parameters of one or more TB transmissions (e.g., celland/or UE specific power adjustments used for calculating receivedtarget power, inter-cell interference control parameter that may be usedas a scaling factor of pathloss measurement, reference signal power tocalculate for pathloss measurement, and/or one or more margins).

There may be one or more ways for a wireless device to generate a RAP.For example, a two-step RACH configuration may comprise a RAP generatingparameters (e.g., a root sequence) that may be employed by the wirelessdevice to generate a RAP. The wireless device may employ the RAPgenerating parameters to generate one or more candidate preambles andmay randomly select one of the candidate preambles as the RAP. The RAPgenerating parameters may be SSB specific and/or cell-specific. Forexample, a RAP generating parameters for a first SSB may be differentfrom or the same to a RAP generating parameters for a second SSB. Forexample, a base station may transmit a control message (e.g., RRCmessage for a handover, and/or a PDCCH order for a secondary celladdition) that comprise a preamble index of a RAP dedicated to awireless device to initiate a two-step RA procedure. The one or morecandidate preambles may be grouped into one or more groups, e.g., eachgroup is associated with a specific amount of data for transmission. Inan example, the amount of data may indicate one or more transport blocksthat a wireless device to transmit (and/or that remain in the buffer).Each of the groups may be associated with a range of data size. Forexample, a first group of the groups may comprise RAPs indicated forsmall data transmissions of a transport block, and a second group maycomprise RAPs indicated for larger data transmissions of a transportblock, and so on. A base station may transmit an RRC message comprisingone or more thresholds with which a wireless device may determine agroup of RAPs by comparing the one or more thresholds and the amount ofdata. By transmitting a RAP from a specific group of RAPs, the wirelessdevice may be able to indicate a size of data it may have fortransmission.

In a two-step RA procedure, a wireless device may transmit the RAP via aRACH resource indicated by a two-step RACH configuration. The wirelessdevice may transmit one or more TBs via an UL radio resource (e.g.,PUSCH) indicated by a two-step RACH configuration. A first transmissionof the RAP and a second transmission of the one or more TBs may bescheduled in a TDM (time-division multiplexing), an FDM(frequency-division multiplexing), and/or a CDM (code-divisionmultiplexing) manner(s). The first transmission of the RAP may beoverlapped in time (partially or entirely) with the second transmissionof the one or more TBs. The two-step RACH configuration may indicate aportion of overlapping of radio resources between the RAP and one ormore TB transmissions. The two-step RACH configuration may indicate oneor more UL radio resources associated with one or more RAPs (or RAPgroups) and/or the RACH resource. For example, one or more downlinkreference signals (SSBs or CSI-RS s) are associated with one or moreRACH resources and/or one or more RAPs. A wireless device may determineat least one RACH resource (e.g., PRACH occasion) among the one or moreRACH resources and/or at least one RAP among the one or more RAPs. Forexample, based on a selection of the at least one RAP and/or the atleast one RACH resource (e.g., PRACH occasions), the wireless device maydetermine at least one UL radio resource (e.g., PUSCH occasions) wherethe wireless device transmits one or more TBs as a part of a two-stepRACH procedure. The one or more UL radio resources may be indicatedbased on a frame structure in FIG. 6, and/or OFDM radio structure inFIG. 8, e.g., with respect to an SFN (SNR=0), slot number, and/or OFDMsymbol number for a time domain radio resource, and/or with respect to asubcarrier number, a number of resource elements, a number of resourceblocks, RBG number, and/or frequency index for a frequency domain radioresource. For example, the one or more UL radio resources may beindicated based on a time offset and/or a frequency offset with respectto one or more RACH resources of a selected RAP. The UL transmissionsmay occur, e.g., in the same subframe (or slot/mini-slot), inconsecutive subframes (or slot/mini-slot), or in the same burst. Forexample, the one or more UL radio resources (e.g., PUSCH occasions) maybe a periodic resources of configured grant Type 1 or Type 2.

For example, a RACH resource (e.g., a PRACH occasion) and one or moreassociated UL radio resources (e.g., PUSCH occasions) for a two-stepMsg1 may be allocated with a time offset and/or frequency offset, e.g.,provided by RRC messages (as a part of RACH config.) and/or predefined(e.g., as a mapping table). FIG. 17A, FIG. 17B, and FIG. 17C areexamples of radio resource allocations of a PRACH resource and one ormore associated UL radio resources based on a time offset, a frequencyoffset, and a combination of a time offset and a frequency offset,respectively. FIG. 17A, FIG. 17B, and FIG. 17C are examples of resourceallocations of a RACH resource (e.g., PRACH occasion) and a UL radioresource (e.g., a PUSCH occasion). FIG. 17A is an example of a PRACHoccasion TDMed with a PUSCH occasion. FIG. 17B is an example of a PRACHoccasion FDMed with a PUSCH occasion. FIG. 17C is an example of a PRACHoccasion TDMed and FDMed with a PUSCH occasion.

A base station may acquire a UL transmission timing by detecting a RAPtransmitted RACH resource (e.g., PRACH occasion) based on the timeoffset and/or the frequency offset. A base station may detect and/ordecode one or more transport blocks transmitted via one or moreassociated UL radio resources based on the UL transmission timingacquired from the RAP detection. For example, a base station maytransmit one or more downlink reference signals (e.g., SSBs or CSI-RSs), and each of the one or more downlink reference signals may beassociated with one or more RACH resources (e.g., PRACH occasions)and/or one or more UL radio resources (e.g., PUSCH occasions) providedby a two-step RACH configuration. A wireless device may measure one ormore downlink reference signals and, based on measured received signalstrength (or based on other selection rule), may select at least onedownlink reference signals among the one or more downlink referencesignals. The wireless device may respectively transmit a RAP and one ormore transport blocks via a RACH resource (e.g., PRACH occasion)associated with the at least one downlink reference signal, and via ULradio resources (e.g., a PUSCH occasions) associated with the RACHresource (e.g., PRACH occasion) and/or associated with the at least onedownlink reference signal.

In an example, a base station may employ a RAP to adjust UL transmissiontime for a cell and/or to aid in channel estimation for one or more TBs.A portion of the UL transmission for one or more TBs in a two-step RACHprocedure may comprise, e.g., a wireless device ID, a C-RNTI, a servicerequest such as buffer state reporting (e.g., a buffer status report)(BSR), one or more user data packets, and/or other information. Awireless device in an RRC CONNECTED state may use a C-RNTI as anidentifier of the wireless device (e.g., a wireless device ID). Awireless device in an RRC INACTIVE state may use a C-RNTI (ifavailable), a resume ID, or a short MAC-ID as an identifier of thewireless device. A wireless device in an RRC IDLE state may use a C-RNTI(if available), a resume ID, a short MACID, an IMSI (InternationalMobile Subscriber Identifier), a T-IMSI (Temporary-IMSI), and/or arandom number as an identifier of the wireless device.

In a two-step RACH procedure, the UL transmission may comprise one ormore TBs that may be transmitted in one or more ways. One or moretransport blocks may be multiplexed with a RAP transmission in timeand/or frequency domains. A base station may configure one or moreresources allocated for the UL transmission that may be indicated to awireless device before the UL transmission. If a wireless devicetransmits one or more TBs in a two-step Msg1 1620 of a two-step RAprocedure, a base station may transmit in a two-step Msg2 1650 (e.g., anRAR) that may comprise a contention resolution message and/or anacknowledgement (ACK or NACK) message of the one or more TBs. Thewireless device may transmit an indicator, such as buffer statereporting, in a two-step Msg1 1620 of a two-step RA procedure. Theindicator may indicate to a base station an amount of data the wirelessdevice to transmit and/or an amount of data remains in a buffer. Thebase station may determine a UL grant based on the indicator. The basestation may transmit the UL grant to the wireless device via an RAR.

In a two-step /RA procedure, a wireless device may receive two separateresponses as a response of Msg A; a first response for RAP transmission;and a second response for one or more TB transmission. A wireless devicemay monitor a PDCCH (e.g., common search space and/or a wireless devicespecific search space) to detect the first response with a random accessRNTI generated based on time and frequency indices of PRACH resourcewhere the wireless device transmits a RAP. A wireless device may monitora common search space and/or a wireless device specific search space todetect the second response. To detect the second response, the wirelessdevice may employ a C-RNTI (e.g., if configured) or a random access RNTIgenerated based on time and frequency indices of PRACH resource wherethe wireless device transmits a RAP. The wireless device specific searchspace may be predefined and/or configured by an RRC message.

One or more events may trigger a two-step random access procedure. Forexample, one or more events may be at least one of following: initialaccess from RRC_IDLE, RRC connection re-establishment procedure,handover, DL or UL data arrival during RRC_CONNECTED when ULsynchronization status is non-synchronized, transition fromRRC_Inactive, beam failure recovery procedure, and/or request for othersystem information. For example, a PDCCH order, a MAC entity, and/or abeam failure indication may initiate a random access procedure.

A two-step RA procedure may be initiated based on one or more case-basedprocedures, services, or radio conditions. For example, a base stationmay configure one or more wireless devices with a two-step RA procedure,for example, if a cell is small (e.g., there is no need of a TA) and/orfor a case of stationary wireless device (e.g., there is no need of TAupdate). A wireless device may acquire the configuration, via one ormore RRC messages (e.g., MIB, system information blocks, multicastand/or unicast RRC signaling), and/or via L1 control signaling (e.g.,PDCCH order) used to initiate a two-step RA procedure.

For example, in a macro coverage area, a wireless device may have astored and/or persisted TA value, e.g., a stationary or near stationarywireless device such as a sensor-type wireless device. In this case atwo-step RA procedure may be initiated. A base station having macrocoverage may use broadcasting and/or dedicated signaling to configure atwo-step RA procedure with one or more wireless devices having storedand/or persisted TA value(s) under the coverage.

A wireless device in an RRC connected state may perform a two-step RAprocedure. For example, the two-step RA procedure may be initiated whena wireless device performs a handover (e.g., network-initiatedhandover), and/or when the wireless device requires or requests a ULgrant for a transmission of delay-sensitive data and there are nophysical-layer uplink control channel resources available to transmit ascheduling request. A wireless device in an RRC INACTIVE state mayperform a two-step RA procedure, e.g., for a small data transmissionwhile remaining in the RRC INACTIVE state or for resuming a connection.A wireless device may initiate a two-step RA procedure, for example, forinitial access such as establishing a radio link, re-establishment of aradio link, handover, establishment of UL synchronization, and/or ascheduling request when there is no UL grant.

The following description presents one or more examples of an RAprocedure. The procedures and/or parameters described in the followingmay not be limited to a specific type of an RA procedure. The proceduresand/or parameters described in the following may be applied for afour-step RA procedure and/or a two-step RA procedure. For example, anRA procedure may refer to a four-step RA procedure and/or a two-step RAprocedure in the following description.

A wireless device may perform a cell search. For example, the wirelessdevice may acquire time and frequency synchronization with the cell anddetect a first physical layer cell ID of the cell during the cell searchprocedure. The wireless device may perform the cell search, for example,when the wireless device has received one or more synchronizationsignals (SS), for example, the primary synchronization signal (PSS) andthe secondary synchronization signal (SSS). The wireless device mayassume that reception occasions of one or more physical broadcastchannels (PBCH), PSS, and SSS are in consecutive symbols, and, forexample, form a SS/PBCH block (SSB). For example, the wireless devicemay assume that SSS, PBCH demodulation reference signal (DM-RS), andPBCH data have the same energy per resource element (EPRE). For example,the wireless device may assume that the ratio of PSS EPRE to SSS EPRE ina SS/PBCH block is a particular value (e.g., either 0 dB or 3 dB). Forexample, the wireless device may assume that the ratio of PDCCH DM-RSEPRE to SSS EPRE is within a particular range (e.g., from −8 dB to 8dB), for example, when the wireless device has not been provideddedicated higher layer parameters.

A wireless device may determine a first symbol index for one or morecandidate SS/PBCH block. For example, for a half frame with SS/PBCHblocks, the first symbol index for one or more candidate SS/PBCH blocksmay be determined according to a subcarrier spacing of the SS/PBCHblocks. For example, index 0 corresponds to the first symbol of thefirst slot in a half-frame. As an example, the first symbol of the oneor more candidate SS/PBCH blocks may have indexes {2, 8}+14·n for 15 kHzsubcarrier spacing, where, for example, n=0, 1 for carrier frequenciessmaller than or equal to 3 GHz, and for example, n=0, 1, 2, 3 forcarrier frequencies larger than 3 GHz and smaller than or equal to 6GHz. The one or more candidate SS/PBCH blocks in a half frame may beindexed in an ascending order in time, for example, from 0 to L−1. Thewireless device may determine some bits (for example, the 2 leastsignificant bits (LSB) for L=4, or the 3 LSB bits for L>4) of a SS/PBCHblock index per half frame from, for example, a one-to-one mapping withone or more index of a DM-RS sequence transmitted in the PBCH.

Prior to initiation of a random access procedure, a base station maytransmit one or more RRC messages to configure a wireless device withone or more parameters of RACH configuration. The one or more RRCmessages may broadcast or multicast to one or more wireless devices. Theone or more RRC messages may be wireless device-specific messages, e.g.,a dedicated RRC messages transmitted to a wireless device with RRCINACTIVE 1520 or RRC CONNECTED 1530. The one or more RRC messages maycomprise one or more parameters required for transmitting at least onepreamble via one or more random access resources. For example, the oneor more parameters may indicate at least one of the following: PRACHresource allocation, preamble format, SSB information (e.g., totalnumber of SSBs, downlink resource allocation of SSB transmission,transmission power of SSB transmission, SSB index corresponding to abeam transmitting the one or more RRC messages and/or otherinformation), and/or uplink radio resources for one or more transportblock transmissions.

The base station may further transmit one or more downlink referencesignals. For example, the one or more downlink reference signals maycomprise one or more discovery reference signals. The wireless devicemay select a first downlink reference signal among the one or moredownlink reference signals. For example, the first downlink referencesignal may comprise one or more synchronization signals and a physicalbroadcast channel (SS/PBCH). For example, the wireless device may adjusta downlink synchronization based on the one or more synchronizationsignals. For example, the one or more downlink reference signals maycomprise one or more channel state information-reference signals(CSI-RS).

The one or more RRC messages may further comprise one or more parametersindicating one or more downlink control channels, for example, PDDCH.Each of the one or more downlink control channels may be associated withat least one of the one or more downlink reference signals. For example,the first downlink reference signal may comprise one or more systeminformation (e.g., master information block (MIB) and/or systeminformation block (SIB)). The base station may transmit the one or moresystem information, for example, on the physical broadcast channel(PBCH), physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), and/or physicaldownlink shared channel (PDSCH).

The one or more system information may comprise at least one informationelement (e.g., PDCCH-Config, PDCCH-ConfigSIB1, PDCCH-ConfigCommon). Theat least one information element may be used, for example, to configurea wireless device with one or more control parameters. The one or morecontrol parameters may comprise one or more parameters of one or morecontrol resource sets (CORESET). For example, the one or more controlparameters comprises the parameters of a first common CORESET #0 (e.g.,controlResourceSetZero), and/or a second common CORESET (e.g.,commonControlResourceSet). The one or more control parameters mayfurther comprise one or more search space sets. For example, the one ormore control parameters comprise the parameters of a first search spacefor the system information block (e.g., searchSpaceSIB1), and/or a firstcommon search space #0 (e.g., searchSpaceZero), and/or a first randomaccess search space (e.g., ra-SearchSpace), and/or a first paging searchspace (e.g., pagingSearchSpace). The wireless device may use the one ormore control parameters to acquire the one or more downlink controlchannels.

A wireless device may monitor a set of one or more candidates for theone or more downlink control channels in the one or more controlresource sets. The one or more control resource sets may be on a firstactive downlink frequency band, e.g., an active bandwidth part (BWP), ona first activated serving cell. For example, the first activated servingcell is configured with the one or more control parameters based on theone or more search space sets. For example, the wireless device decodeseach of the one or more downlink control channels in the set ofcandidates for the one or more downlink control channels according to afirst format of a first downlink control information (DCI). The set ofcandidates for the one or more downlink control channels may be definedin terms of the one or more search space sets. For example, the one ormore search space sets are one or more common search space sets (e.g.,Type0-PDCCH, Type0A-PDCCH, Type1-PDCCH, Type2-PDCCH, and/orType3-PDCCH), and/or one or more wireless device-specific search spacesets.

For example, the wireless device may monitor the set of candidates forthe one or more downlink control channels in a Type0-PDCCH common searchspace set. For example, the Type0-PDCCH common search space set may beconfigured by the at least one information element, e.g., thePDCCH-ConfigSIB1 in the MIB. For example, the Type0-PDCCH common searchspace set may be configured by the one or more search space sets, e.g.,a searchSpaceSIB1 in the PDCCH-ConfigCommon, or the searchSpaceZero inthe PDCCH-ConfigCommon. For example, the Type0-PDCCH common search spaceset may be configured for a first format of a first downlink controlinformation scrambled by a first radio network temporary identifier,e.g., a system information-radio network temporary identifier (SI-RNTI).

For example, the wireless device may monitor the set of candidates forthe one or more downlink control channels in a Type1-PDCCH common searchspace set. For example, the Type1-PDCCH common search space set may beconfigured by the one or more search space sets, e.g., thera-searchSpace in the PDCCH-ConfigCommon. For example, the Type1-PDCCHcommon search space set may be configured for a second format of asecond downlink control information scrambled by a second radio networktemporary identifier, e.g., a random access-radio network temporaryidentifier (RA-RNTI), a temporary cell-radio network temporaryidentifier (TC-RNTI), C-RNTI, and/or an RNTI that generated by awireless device, e.g., generated for a two-step RA procedure.

The wireless device may determine, for example during a cell search,that a first control resource set for a first common search space (e.g.,Type0-PDCCH) is present. The first control resource set may comprise oneor more resource blocks and one or more symbols. The one or more RRCmessages may comprise one or more parameters indicating one or moremonitoring occasions of the one or more downlink control channels. Forexample, the wireless device may determine a number of consecutiveresource blocks and a number of consecutive symbols for the firstcontrol resource set of the first common search space. For example, oneor more bits (e.g., a four most significant bits) of the at least oneinformation element (e.g., PDCCH-ConfigSIB1) may indicate the number ofconsecutive resource blocks and the number of consecutive symbols. Forexample, the wireless device may determine the one or more monitoringoccasions of the one or more downlink control channels from one or morebits (e.g., a four least significant bits) of the at least oneinformation element (e.g., PDCCH-ConfigSIB1). For example, the one ormore monitoring occasions of the one or more downlink control channelsassociated with a first downlink reference signal (e.g., SSB or CSI-RS)may be determined based on one or more system frame numbers and one ormore slot indexes of the first control resource set. For example, thefirst downlink reference signal with a first index may overlap in timewith the first frame number and the first slot index.

The wireless device may determine a first downlink channel among the oneor more downlink control channels, based on a first downlink referencesignal (e.g., SSB or CSI-RS). For example, the first downlink channelmay be a first downlink control channel, or a first system informationblock (e.g., SIB1). The wireless device may assume that a demodulationreference signal antenna port associated with a reception of the firstdownlink channel is quasi co-located (QCL) with the first downlinkreference signal. For example, the demodulation reference signal antennaport associated with the reception of the first downlink channel and thefirst downlink reference signal (e.g., the corresponding SS/PBCH block)may be quasi co-located with respect to at least one of the following:an average gain, QCL-TypeA, and/or QCL-TypeD.

A physical layer of the wireless device may receive, from higher layers,one or more SS/PBCH block indexes. For example, the physical layer mayreceive one or more configuration parameters of one or more physicalrandom access channel (PRACH) transmission parameters (e.g., the one ormore PRACH transmission parameters may indicate PRACH preamble format,preamble index, a corresponding RA-RNTI, time resources, and/orfrequency resources for PRACH transmission), and/or parameters fordetermining one or more sequences and their shifts in the PRACH preamblesequence set (e.g., set type). The physical layer may provide to higherlayers one or more corresponding sets of reference signal received power(RSRP) measurements.

The random access procedure may comprise one or more transmissions of arandom access preamble (e.g., Msg1) in one or more PRACH occasions. Therandom access procedure may further comprise one or more transmissionsof one or more random access response (RAR) messages, for example, withone or more physical downlink channels (e.g., Msg2). The random accessprocedure may further comprise one or more Msg3 in one or more physicaluplink channels (e.g., PUSCH), and one or more physical downlinkchannels (PDSCH) for contention resolution. The random access proceduremay be triggered upon request of one or more PRACH transmissions, forexample, by higher layers or by one or more control orders (e.g., PDCCHorder).

For a two-step RA procedure, the random access procedure may comprise afirst transmission of one or more Msg A comprising at least one randomaccess preamble transmitted via one or more PRACH occasions and at leastone transport block transmitted via one or more PUSCH occasions and asecond transmission of one or more Msg B (e.g., RARs).

A MAC entity of the wireless device may select one or more random accessresources for a random access procedure initiated. The MAC entity mayselect a first downlink reference signal. For example, the MAC entitymay select the first downlink reference signal (e.g., a first SS/PBCHblock (SSB), or a first channel state information-reference signal(CSI-RS)) with the first reference signal received power (RSRP) above afirst reference signal received power threshold. For example, the firstreference signal received power threshold may be defined per a type ofreference signal (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB may for an SSB, andrsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS for a CSI-RS). The first reference signal receivedpower threshold may be broadcast, semi-statically configured, and/orpredefined. For example, the MAC entity may select the first downlinkreference signal for contention-free random access procedure, forexample for beam failure recovery, or system information request. Forexample, the MAC entity may select the first downlink reference signalfor contention-based random access procedure.

The wireless device may select one or more random access resources. Theone or more random access resources may, for example, comprise one ormore random access preambles, one or more time resources, and/or one ormore frequency resources for PRACH transmission. The one or more randomaccess resources may be predefined. The one or more random accessresources may be configured by one or more RRC messages. The one or morerandom access resources may be configured by one or more downlinkcontrol orders (e.g., PDCCH order). The one or more random accessresources may be determined based on the first downlink referencesignal. The wireless device may transmit at least one preamble via atleast one random access resource (e.g., at least one PRACH occasion).The at least one preamble may be transmitted using a first PRACH formatwith a first transmission power via the at least one random accessresource. The one or more PRACH resources may comprise one or more PRACHoccasions.

The one or more RRC messages may comprise one or more random accessparameters. For example, a common (or generic) random accessconfiguration message (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon and/orRACH-ConfigGeneric) may comprise at least one of the following: a totalnumber of random access preambles (e.g., totalNumberOfRA-Preambles), oneor more PRACH configuration index (e.g., prach-ConfigurationIndex), anumber of PRACH occasions that may be multiplexed in frequency domain(FDMed) in a time instance (e.g., msg1-FDM), an offset of a lowest PRACHoccasion in frequency domain with respect to a first resource block(e.g., msg1-FrequencyStart), a power ramping step for PRACH (e.g.,powerRampingStep), a target power level at the network receiver side(preambleReceivedTargetPower), a maximum number of random accesspreamble transmission that may be performed (e.g., preambleTransMax), awindow length for a random access response (i.e., RAR, e.g., Msg2)(e.g., ra-ResponseWindow), a number of SSBs per random access channel(RACH) occasion and a number of contention-based preambles per SSB(e.g., ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB). For example, thetotal number of random access preambles may be a multiple of the numberof SSBs per RACH occasion. For example, the window length for RAR may bein number of slots. For example, a dedicated random access configurationmessage (e.g., RACH-ConfigDedicated) may comprise one or more RACHoccasions for contention-free random access (e.g., occasions), and oneor more PRACH mask index for random access resource selection (e.g.,ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex).

The one or more random access parameters (e.g.,ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB) may provide the wirelessdevice with a first number (e.g., N) of the one or more downlinkreference signals (e.g., SS/PBCH blocks) that may be associated with afirst PRACH occasion. The one or more random access parameters (e.g.,ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB) may provide the wirelessdevice with a second number (e.g., R) of the one or more random accesspreambles for the first downlink reference signal and for the firstPRACH occasion. The one or more random access preambles may becontention based preambles. The first downlink reference signal may be afirst SS/PBCH block. For example, according to the first number (e.g.,if N<1), the first SS/PBCH block may be mapped to at least one (e.g.,1/N) consecutive valid PRACH occasions. For example, according to thesecond number (e.g., R), at least one preamble with consecutive indexesassociated with the first SS/PBCH block may start from the firstpreamble index for the first valid PRACH occasion.

For example, the one or more PRACH configuration indexes (e.g.,prach-ConfigurationIndex), may indicate a preamble format, a periodicityfor the one or more PRACH time resources, one or more PRACH subframenumbers, a number of PRACH slots within the one or more PRACH subframes,a PRACH starting symbol number, and/or a number of time domain PRACHoccasions within the first PRACH slot.

The one or more random access parameters may further comprise anassociation period for mapping the one or more SS/PBCH blocks to the oneor more PRACH occasions. For example, the one or more SS/PBCH blockindexes may be mapped to the one or more PRACH occasions based on anorder. For example, the order may be as follows: In increasing order ofthe indexes of the at least one preamble in the first PRACH occasion. Inincreasing order of the indexes of the one or more frequency resources(e.g., for frequency multiplexed PRACH occasions). In increasing orderof the indexes of the one or more time resources (e.g., for timemultiplexed PRACH occasions) in the first PRACH slot. In increasingorder of the indexes for the PRACH slots.

For example, for the PRACH transmission triggered by the one or morecontrol orders (e.g., PDCCH order), one or more PRACH mask indexes(e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex) may indicate the one or more PRACHoccasions. The one or more PRACH occasions may be associated with thefirst SS/PBCH block index indicated by the one or more control orders.For example, the PRACH occasions may be mapped consecutively for thefirst SS/PBCH block index. The wireless device may select the firstPRACH occasion indicated by a first PRACH mask index value for the firstSS/PBCH block index in the first association period. The firstassociation period may be a first mapping cycle. The wireless device mayreset the one or more indexes of the one or more PRACH occasions for thefirst mapping cycle.

In an example, a base station may transmit, to a wireless device, one ormore messages indicating random access parameters of a four-step randomaccess procedure in FIG. 12 and/or a two-step random access procedure inFIG. 16. For example, the one or more messages may be broadcast RRCmessage, wireless device specific RRC message, and/or combinationthereof. For example, the one or more message may comprise at least oneof random access common configuration (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon), randomaccess generic configuration (e.g., RACH-ConfigGeneric), and/or randomaccess configuration dedicated to a wireless device (e.g.,RACH-ConfigDedicated). For example, for a contention based (four-stepand/or a two-step) random access procedure, a wireless device mayreceive, from a base station, at least RACH-ConfigCommon andRACH-ConfigGeneric. For example, for a contention free (four-step and/ora two-step) random access procedure, a wireless device may receive, froma base station, at least RACH-ConfigDedicated.

For example, a random access procedure may be initiated in one or moreways at least based on one of RACH-ConfigCommon, RACH-ConfigGeneric, andRACH-ConfigDedicated. For example, a random access procedure may beinitiated by a PDCCH order transmitted by a base station, by the MACentity of a wireless device, and/or by RRC. There may be one randomaccess procedure ongoing at any point in time in a MAC entity. A randomaccess procedure on an SCell may be initiated by a PDCCH order withra-PreambleIndex different from a first index (that may be predefined orconfigured e.g., 0b000000). For example, if the MAC entity of a wirelessdevice receives a request for a random access procedure while another isalready ongoing in the MAC entity, a wireless device may continue withthe ongoing procedure or start with the new procedure (e.g. for SIrequest).

An example random access common configuration (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon)may be below:

RACH-ConfigCommon ::= SEQUENCE { rach-ConfigGeneric RACH-ConfigGeneric,totalNumberOfRA-Preambles INTEGER (1..63) OPTIONAL, -- Need Sssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB CHOICE { oneEighth ENUMERATED{n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64},oneFourth ENUMERATED{n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64}, oneHalfENUMERATED{n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64}, oneENUMERATED{n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32,n36,n40,n44,n48,n52,n56,n60,n64}, twoENUMERATED {n4,n8,n12,n16,n20,n24,n28,n32}, four INTEGER (1..16), eightINTEGER (1..8), sixteen INTEGER (1..4) } OPTIONAL,-- Need MgroupBconfigured SEQUENCE { ra-Msg3SizeGroupA ENUMERATED { b56, b144,b208, b256, b282, b480, b640, b800, b1000, spare7, spare6, spare5,spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1}, messagePowerOffsetGroupB ENUMERATED {minusinfinity, dB0, dB5, dB8, dB10, dB12, dB15, dB18},numberOfRA-PreamblesGroupA INTEGER (1..64) } OPTIONAL,-- Need Rra-ContentionResolutionTimer ENUMERATED { sf8, sf16, sf24, sf32, sf40,sf48, sf56, sf64}, rsrp-ThresholdSSB RSRP-Range OPTIONAL, -- Need Rrsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL RSRP-Range OPTIONAL, -- Cond SULprach-RootSequenceIndex CHOICE { l839 INTEGER (0..837), l139 INTEGER(0..137) }, msg1-SubcarrierSpacing SubcarrierSpacing OPTIONAL, --Need SrestrictedSetConfig ENUMERATED {unrestrictedSet, restrictedSetTypeA,restrictedSetTypeB}, msg3-transformPrecoding ENUMERATED {enabled}OPTIONAL, -- Need R ... }

For example, messagePowerOffsetGroupB may indicate a threshold forpreamble selection. The value of messagePowerOffsetGroupB may be in dB.For example, minusinfinity in RACH-ConfigCommon may corresponds toinfinity. The value dB0 may correspond to 0 dB, dB5 may correspond to 5dB and so on. msg1-SubcarrierSpacing in RACH-ConfigCommon may indicate asubcarrier spacing of PRACH. One or more values, e.g., 15 or 30 kHz (<6GHz), 60 or 120 kHz (>6 GHz) may be applicable. There may be a layer 1parameter (e.g., ‘prach-Msg1SubcarrierSpacing) corresponding tomsg1-SubcarrierSpacing. A wireless device may apply the SCS as derivedfrom the prach-ConfigurationIndex in RACH-ConfigGeneric, for example, ifthis parameter is absent. A base station may employmsg3-transformPrecoding to indicate to a wireless device whethertransform precoding is enabled for data transmission (e.g., Msg3 in afour-step RA procedure and/or one or more TB transmission in a two-stepRA procedure). Absence of msg3-transfromPrecoding may indicate that itis disabled. numberOfRA-PreamblesGroupA may indicate a number ofcontention based (CB) preambles per SSB in group A. This may determineimplicitly the number of CB preambles per SSB available in group B. Thesetting may be consistent with the setting ofssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB. prach-RootSequenceIndex mayindicate PRACH root sequence index. There may be a layer 1 parameter(e.g., ‘PRACHRootSequenceIndex’) corresponding tossb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblePerSSB. The value range may depend ona size of preamble, e.g., whether a preamble length (L) is L=839 orL=139. ra-ContentionResolutionTimer may indicate an initial value forthe contention resolution timer. For example, a value ms8 inRACH-ConfigCommon may indicate 8 ms, value ms16 may indicate 16 ms, andso on. ra-Msg3SizeGroupA may indicate a transport blocks size thresholdin bit. For example, a wireless device may employ a contention based RApreamble of group A, for example, when the transport block size is belowra-Msg3SizeGroupA. rach-ConfigGeneric may indicate one or more genericRACH parameters in RACH-ConfigGeneric. restrictedSetConfig may indicatea configuration of an unrestricted set or one of two types of restrictedsets. rsrp-ThresholdSSB may indicate a threshold for SS block selection.For example, a wireless device may select the SS block and correspondingPRACH resource for path-loss estimation and (re)transmission based on SSblocks that satisfy the threshold. rsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL may indicate athreshold for uplink carrier selection. For example, a wireless devicemay select a SUL carrier to perform random access based on thisthreshold. ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB may indicate anumber of SSBs per RACH occasion and a number of contention basedpreambles per SSB. There may be layer 1 one or more parameters (e.g.,‘SSB-per-rach-occasion’ and/or ‘CB-preambles-per-SSB’) corresponding tossb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB. For example, a total numberof CB preambles in a RACH occasion may be given byCB-preambles-per-SSB*max(1,SSB-per-rach-occasion).totalNumberOfRA-Preambles may indicate a total number of preamblesemployed for contention based and contention free random access. Forexample, totalNumberOfRA-Preambles may not comprise one or morepreambles employed for other purposes (e.g. for SI request). A wirelessdevice may use one or more of 64 preambles for RA, for example, if thefield is absent.

An example random access common configuration of RACH-ConfigGeneric maybe below:

RACH-ConfigGeneric ::= SEQUENCE { prach-ConfigurationIndex INTEGER(0..255), msg1-FDM ENUMERATED {one, two, four, eight},msg1-FrequencyStart INTEGER (0..maxNrofPhysicalResourceBlocks-1),zeroCorrelationZoneConfig INTEGER(0..15), preambleReceivedTargetPowerINTEGER (−202..−60), preambleTransMax ENUMERATED {n3, n4, n5, n6, n7,n8,n10, n20, n50, n100, n200}, powerRampingStep ENUMERATED {dB0, dB2, dB4,dB6}, ra-ResponseWindow ENUMERATED {sl1 sl2, sl4, sl8, sl10, sl20, sl40,sl80}, ... }

For example, msg1-FDM may indicate a number of PRACH transmissionoccasions FDMed in one time instance. There may be a layer 1 parameter(e.g., ‘prach-FDM’) corresponding to msg1-FDM. msg1-FrequencyStart mayindicate an offset of PRACH transmission occasion (e.g., lowest PRACHtransmission occasion) in frequency domain with respective to aparticular PRB (e.g., PRB 0). A base station may configure a value ofmsg1-FrequencyStart such that the corresponding RACH resource is withinthe bandwidth of the UL BWP. There may be a layer 1 parameter (e.g.,‘prach-frequency-start’) corresponding to msg1-FreqencyStart.powerRampingStep may indicate power ramping steps for PRACH.prach-ConfigurationIndex may indicate a PRACH configuration index. Forexample, a radio access technology (e.g., LTE, and/or NR) may predefineone or more PRACH configurations, and prach-ConfigurationIndex mayindicate one of the one or more PRACH configurations. There may be alayer 1 parameter (e.g., ‘PRACHConfigurationIndex’) corresponding toprach-ConfigurationIndex. preambleReceivedTargetPower may indicate atarget power level at the network receiver side. For example, multiplesof a particular value (e.g., in dBm) may be chosen. RACH-ConfigGenericabove shows an example when multiples of 2 dBm are chosen (e.g. −202,−200, −198, . . . ). preambleTransMax may indicate a number of RApreamble transmissions performed before declaring a failure. Forexample, preambleTransMax may indicate a maximum number of RA preambletransmissions performed before declaring a failure. ra-ResponseWindowmay indicate an RAR window length in number of slots (or subframes,mini-slots, and/or symbols). a base station may configure a value lowerthan or equal to a particular value (e.g., 10 ms). The value may belarger than a particular value (e.g., 10 ms). zeroCorrelationZoneConfigmay indicate an index of preamble sequence generation configuration(e.g., N-CS configuration). A radio access technology (e.g., LTE and/orNR) may predefine one or more preamble sequence generationconfigurations, and zeroCorrelationZoneConfig may indicate one of theone or more preamble sequence generation configurations. For example, awireless device may determine a cyclic shift of preamble sequence basedon zeroCorrelationZoneConfig. zeroCorrelationZoneConfig may determine aproperty of random access preambles (e.g., a zero correlation zone)

An example random access dedicated configuration (e.g.,RACH-ConfigDedicated) may be below:

RACH-ConfigDedicated ::= SEQUENCE { cfra CFRA OPTIONAL, -- Need Nra-Prioritization RA-Prioritization OPTIONAL, -- Need N ... } CFRA ::=SEQUENCE { occasions SEQUENCE { rach-ConfigGeneric RACH-ConfigGeneric,ssb-perRACH-Occasion ENUMERATED {oneEighth, oneFourth, oneHalf, one,two, four, eight, sixteen} OPTIONAL -- Cond SSB-CFRA } OPTIONAL,-- NeedS resources CHOICE { ssb SEQUENCE { ssb-ResourceList SEQUENCE(SIZE(1..maxRA-SSB-Resources)) OF CFRA-SSB-Resource,ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex INTEGER (0..15) }, csirs SEQUENCE {csirs-ResourceList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxRA-CSIRS-Resources)) OFCFRA-CSIRS-Resource, rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS RSRP-Range } }, ... }CFRA-SSB-Resource ::= SEQUENCE { ssb SSB-Index, ra-PreambleIndex INTEGER(0..63), ... } CFRA-CSIRS-Resource ::= SEQUENCE { csi-RS CSI-RS-Index,ra-OccasionList SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxRA-OccasionsPerCSIRS)) OF INTEGER(0..maxRA-Occasions-1), ra-PreambleIndex INTEGER (0..63), ... }

For example, csi-RS may indicate an identifier (e.g., ID) of a CSI-RSresource defined in the measurement object associated with this servingcell. ra-OccasionList may indicate one or more RA occasions. A wirelessdevice may employ the one or more RA occasions, for example, when thewireless device performs a contention-free random access (CFRA)procedure upon selecting the candidate beam identified by this CSI-RS.ra-PreambleIndex may indicate an RA preamble index to use in the RAoccasions associated with this CSI-RS. ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex mayindicate a PRACH Mask Index for RA Resource selection. The mask may bevalid for one or more SSB resources signaled in ssb-ResourceList.rach-ConfigGeneric may indicate a configuration of contention freerandom access occasions for the CFRA procedure. ssb-perRACH-Occasion mayindicate a number of SSBs per RACH occasion. ra-PreambleIndex mayindicate a preamble index that a wireless device may employ whenperforming CF-RA upon selecting the candidate beams identified by thisSSB. ssb in RACH-ConfigDedicated may indicate an identifier (e.g., ID)of an SSB transmitted by this serving cell. cfra in RACH-ConfigDedicatedmay indicate one or more parameters for contention free random access toa given target cell. A wireless device may perform contention basedrandom access, for example, if the field (e.g., cfra) is absent.ra-prioritization may indicate one or more parameters which apply forprioritized random access procedure to a given target cell. A field,SSB-CFRA, in RACH-ConfigDedicated may be present, for example, if thefield resources in CFRA is set to ssb; otherwise it may be not present.

In an example, a base station may transmit, to a wireless device, one ormore RRC message indicating at least one of following for a randomaccess procedure:

an available set of PRACH occasions for the transmission of the RandomAccess Preamble (e.g., prach-ConfigIndex), an initial Random AccessPreamble power (e.g., preambleReceivedTargetPower), an RSRP thresholdfor the selection of the SSB and corresponding Random Access Preambleand/or PRACH occasion (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB, rsrp-ThresholdSSB may beconfigured in a beam failure recovery configuration, e.g.,BeamFailureRecoveryConfig IE, for example, if the Random Accessprocedure is initiated for beam failure recovery), an RSRP threshold forthe selection of CSI-RS and corresponding Random Access Preamble and/orPRACH occasion (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS, rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS may beset to a value calculated based on rsrp-ThresholdSSB and an offsetvalue, e.g., by multiplying rsrp-ThresholdSSB by powerControlOffset), anRSRP threshold for the selection between the NUL carrier and the SULcarrier (e.g., rsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL), a power offset betweenrsrp-ThresholdSSB and rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS to be employed when theRandom Access procedure is initiated for beam failure recovery (e.g.,powerControlOffset), a power-ramping factor (e.g., powerRampingStep), apower-ramping factor in case of differentiated Random Access procedure(e.g., powerRampingStepHighPriority), an index of Random Access Preamble(e.g., ra-PreambleIndex), an index (e.g., ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex)indicating PRACH occasion(s) associated with an SSB in which the MACentity may transmit a Random Access Preamble (e.g., FIG. 18 shows anexample of ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex values), PRACH occasion(s)associated with a CSI-RS in which the MAC entity may transmit a RandomAccess Preamble (e.g., ra-OccasionList), a maximum number of RandomAccess Preamble transmission (e.g., preambleTransMax), a number of SSBsmapped to each PRACH occasion and a number of Random Access Preamblesmapped to each SSB (e.g., ssb-perRACH-OccasionAndCB-PreamblesPerSSB, thetime window (duration, and/or interval) to monitor RA response(s) (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow) and/or a Contention Resolution Timer (e.g.,ra-ContentionResolutionTimer).

In an example, a random access procedure may be initiated for beamfailure detection and recovery. For example, a wireless device may beconfigured by RRC with a beam failure recovery procedure which may beemployed for indicating to the serving base station of an SSB or CSI-RSwhen beam failure is detected on the serving SSB(s)/CSI-RS(s). Beamfailure may be detected by counting one or more beam failure instanceindication from the lower layers to the MAC entity. For example, a basestation may configure a wireless device by transmitting an RRC message(e.g., comprising a beam failure recovery configuration, e.g.,BeamFailureRecoveryConfig) indicating at least one of following:beamFailureInstanceMaxCount for the beam failure detection.beamFailureDetectionTimer for the beam failure detection,beamFailureRecoveryTimer for the beam failure recovery procedure,rsrp-ThresholdSSB for an RSRP threshold for the beam failure recovery,powerRampingStep for the beam failure recovery,preambleReceivedTargetPower, preambleReceivedTargetPower for the beamfailure recovery, preambleTransMax for the beam failure recovery, thetime window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) to monitor response(s) for thebeam failure recovery using contention-free Random Access Preamble,prach-ConfigIndex for the beam failure recovery,ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex for the beam failure recovery, ra-OccasionListfor the beam failure recovery.

In an example, a wireless device may employ one or more parameters for arandom access procedure. For example, a wireless device may employ atleast one of PREAMBLE_INDEX; PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER;PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER; PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP;PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER; PREAMBLE_BACKOFF; PCMAX;SCALING_FACTOR_BI; and TEMPORARY_C-RNTI.

In an example, a wireless device may perform random access resourceselection for selecting one or more preambles and one or more PRACHoccasion (or resources comprising time, frequency, and/or code). Forexample, there may be one or more cases that a random access proceduremay be initiated for beam failure recovery; and/or thebeamFailureRecoveryTimer is either running or not configured; and/or thecontention-free Random Access Resources for beam failure recoveryrequest associated with any of the SSBs and/or CSI-RS s have beenexplicitly provided by RRC; and/or at least one of the SSBs with SS-RSRPabove rsrp-ThresholdSSB amongst the SSBs in candidateBeamRSList or theCSI-RS s with CSI-RSRP above rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS amongst the CSI-RS sin candidateBeamRSList is available. In this case, a wireless device mayselect one or more SSBs with corresponding one or more SS-RSRP valuesabove rsrp-ThresholdSSB amongst the SSBs in candidateBeamRSList or oneor more CSI-RSs with corresponding one or more CSI-RSRP values aboversrp-ThresholdCSI-RS amongst the CSI-RS s in candidateBeamRSList. Forexample, a wireless device may select at least one CSI-RS and set thePREAMBLE_INDEX to a ra-PreambleIndex corresponding to the SSB incandidateBeamRSList which is quasi-collocated with the at least oneCSI-RS selected by the wireless device, for example, if there is nora-PreambleIndex associated with the at least one CSI-RS, otherwise thewireless device may set the PREAMBLE_INDEX to a ra-PreambleIndexcorresponding to the selected SSB or CSI-RS from the set of RandomAccess Preambles for beam failure recovery request.

For example, a wireless device may be under one of following cases: arandom access procedure may be initiated, a ra-PreambleIndex has beenprovided by either PDCCH or RRC, the ra-PreambleIndex is not a firstpreamble index (that may be predefined or configured e.g., 0b000000),contention-free Random Access Resource associated with SSBs or CSI-RSshave not been provided by RRC. In this case, the wireless device may setthe PREAMBLE_INDEX to the signaled ra-PreambleIndex.

For example, there may be one or more cases that a random accessprocedure may be initiated and/or the contention-free Random AccessResources associated with SSBs have been explicitly provided by RRC andat least one SSB with SS-RSRP above rsrp-ThresholdSSB amongst theassociated SSBs is available. In this case, a wireless device may selectan SSB with SS-RSRP above rsrp-ThresholdSSB amongst the associated SSBs.For example, the wireless device may set the PREAMBLE_INDEX to ara-PreambleIndex corresponding to the selected SSB.

For example, there may be one or more cases that a random accessprocedure may be initiated, and the contention-free random accessresources associated with CSI-RSs have been explicitly provided by RRCand at least one CSI-RS with CSI-RSRP above rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS amongstthe associated CSI-RSs is available. In this case, a wireless device mayselect a CSI-RS with CSI-RSRP above rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS amongst theassociated CSI-RSs. for example, the wireless device may set thePREAMBLE_INDEX to a ra-PreambleIndex corresponding to the selectedCSI-RS.

For example, there may be one or more cases that a random accessprocedure may be initiated and at least one of the SSBs with SS-RSRPabove rsrp-ThresholdSSB is available. In this case, for example, awireless device may select an SSB with SS-RSRP above rsrp-ThresholdSSB,otherwise may select any SSB. For example, a random access resourceselection is performed when Msg3 1240, two-step Msg1 1620, and/or one ormore TBs 1640 is being retransmitted, a wireless device may select thesame group of Random Access Preambles as was employed for the RandomAccess Preamble transmission attempt corresponding to the firsttransmission of Msg3, two-step Msg1 1620, and/or one or more TBs 1640.For example, if the association between random access preambles and SSBsis configured, a wireless device may select a ra-PreambleIndex randomlywith equal probability from the Random Access Preambles associated withthe selected SSB and the selected Random Access Preambles group. Forexample, if the association between random access preambles and SSBs isnot configured, a wireless device may select a ra-PreambleIndex randomlywith equal probability from the Random Access Preambles within theselected Random Access Preambles group. For example, a wireless devicemay set the PREAMBLE INDEX to the selected ra-PreambleIndex.

In an example, if an SSB is selected above and an association betweenPRACH occasions and SSBs is configured, a wireless device determines thenext available PRACH occasion from the PRACH occasions corresponding tothe selected SSB permitted by the restrictions given by thera-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex if configured (e.g., the MAC entity of thewireless device may select a PRACH occasion (e.g., randomly with equalprobability) amongst the PRACH occasions occurring simultaneously but ondifferent subcarriers, corresponding to the selected SSB; the MAC entitymay take into account the possible occurrence of measurement gaps whendetermining the next available PRACH occasion corresponding to theselected SSB).

In an example, if a CSI-RS is selected above and an association betweenPRACH occasions and CSI-RSs is configured. a wireless device determinesthe next available PRACH occasion from the PRACH occasions inra-OccasionList corresponding to the selected CSI-RS (e.g. the MACentity of the wireless device may select a PRACH occasion randomly withequal probability amongst the PRACH occasions occurring simultaneouslybut on different subcarriers, corresponding to the selected CSI-RS; theMAC entity may take into account the possible occurrence of measurementgaps when determining the next available PRACH occasion corresponding tothe selected CSI-RS).

In an example, if a CSI-RS is selected above and there is nocontention-free Random Access Resource associated with the selectedCSI-RS, a wireless device may determine the next available PRACHoccasion from the PRACH occasions, permitted by the restrictions givenby the ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex if configured, corresponding to the SSBin candidateBeamRSList which is quasi-collocated with the selectedCSI-RS (e.g., the MAC entity of the wireless device may take intoaccount the possible occurrence of measurement gaps when determining thenext available PRACH occasion corresponding to the SSB which isquasi-collocated with the selected CSI-RS).

A wireless device may determine the next available PRACH occasion (e.g.,the MAC entity of the wireless device may select a PRACH occasion (e.g.,randomly with equal probability) amongst the PRACH occasions occurringsimultaneously but on different subcarriers; the MAC entity may takeinto account the possible occurrence of measurement gaps whendetermining the next available PRACH occasion).

A wireless device may perform the random access preamble transmissionbased on a selected PREABLE INDEX and PRACH occasion. For example, ifthe notification of suspending power ramping counter has not beenreceived from lower layers; and/or if an SSB and/or a CSI-RS selected isnot changed (i.e. same as the previous Random Access Preambletransmission), a wireless device may incrementPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER by one. The wireless device may select avalue of DELTA_PREAMBLE that may be predefined and/or semi-staticallyconfigured by a base station and set PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER topreambleReceivedTargetPower+DELTA_PREAMBLE+(PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER−1)×PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP.

A MAC entity of the wireless device may instruct the physical layer totransmit the Random Access Preamble using the selected PRACH,corresponding RA-RNTI (e.g., if available), PREAMBLE_INDEX andPREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER. For example, the wireless devicedetermines an RA-RNTI associated with the PRACH occasion in which theRandom Access Preamble is transmitted, e.g., In an example, the RA-RNTIassociated with the PRACH in which the Random Access Preamble istransmitted, may be determined in terms of index of the first OFDMsymbol of the specified PRACH, an index of the first slot of thespecified PRACH in a system frame, an index of the specified PRACH inthe frequency domain, and/or uplink carrier indicator. For example, anexample RA-RNTI may be calculated as:

RA-RNTI=1+s_id+14×t_id+14×80×f_id+14×80×8×ul_carrier_id

where s_id may be the index of the first OFDM symbol of the specifiedPRACH (0≤s_id<14), t_id may be the index of the first slot of thespecified PRACH in a system frame (0≤t_id<80), f_id may be the index ofthe specified PRACH in the frequency domain (0≤f_id<8), andul_carrier_id (0 for NUL carrier, and 1 for SUL carrier or vice versa)may be the UL carrier used for Msg1 1220 transmission or two-step Msg11620.

For example, a wireless device, that transmitted a random accesspreamble, may start to monitor a downlink control channel for a randomaccess response corresponding to the random access preamble. Thepossible occurrence of a measurement gap may not determine when awireless device starts to monitor a downlink control channel.

If a wireless device performs a contention-free random access procedurefor a beam failure recovery request, the wireless device may start arandom access window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) configured in a beammanagement configuration parameter (e.g., BeamFailureRecoveryConfig) ata first downlink control channel (e.g., PDCCH) occasion from the end ofthe Random Access Preamble transmission. The wireless device may monitorthe first downlink control channel of the SpCell for a response to beamfailure recovery request identified by the C-RNTI while the randomaccess window is running.

If a wireless device down not performs a contention-free random accessprocedure for beam a failure recovery request, the wireless device maystart a random access window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) configured in arandom access configuration parameter (e.g., RACH-ConfigCommon) at afirst downlink control channel occasion from an end of a random accesspreamble transmission. The wireless device may monitor the firstdownlink control channel occasion of the SpCell for random accessresponse(s) identified by the RA-RNTI while a random access responsewindow (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow) is running.

In an example, a downlink assignment may be received by a wirelessdevice, on the PDCCH for the RA-RNTI and the received TB (e.g., MAC PDUcomprising one or more random access responses is successfully decoded.For example, the MAC PDU may comprise a MAC subPDU with Random AccessPreamble identifier corresponding to a preamble that a wireless devicetransmits to a base station. In this case, the wireless device maydetermine that this random access response reception may be successful.For example, the MAC subPDU may comprise a preamble index (e.g., RAPID)only, e.g., for a random access procedure initiated for a systeminformation request.

In a RA procedure, a wireless device may receive from a base station atleast one RAR as a response of Msg1 1220 or two-step Msg1 1620. The atleast one RAR may be scrambled by a particular radio network temporaryidentifier (e.g., RA-RNTI). The wireless device may monitor a searchspace set (e.g., the Type1-PDCCH common search space) for a firstdownlink control information (e.g., DCI format 1_0). The first downlinkcontrol information may comprise the at least one RAR. For example, abase station may transmit the at least one RAR in a form of DCI format1_0 for a random access procedure initiated by PDCCH order, MAC layer,and/or RRC layer. For example, the DCI format 1_0 may comprise at leastone of the following fields: one or more random access preamble index,SS/PBCH index, PRACH mask index, UL/SUL indicator, frequency and timedomain resource assignments, modulation and/or coding schemes.

A wireless device may monitor for the first downlink control information(e.g., DCI format 1_0) during a time window. The time window may beindicated by the one or more RRC messages. The time window may start ata first symbol of a first control resource set. The wireless device maybe configured by the one or more parameters in the one or more RRCmessages to receive the first downlink control information on the firstcontrol resource set. The wireless device may determine a length of thetime window based on the one or more parameters in the one or more RRCmessages (e.g., ra-ResponseWindow). The length of the time window may bein number of slots.

The wireless device may stop the time window after or in response to areception of the one or more random access responses being determined assuccessful. A reception of the one or more random access responses maybe determined as successful, for example, when the one or more randomaccess responses comprise a preamble index (e.g., a random accesspreamble identity: RAPID) corresponding to a preamble that the wirelessdevice transmits to a base station. For example, the RAPID may beassociated with the PRACH transmission. The one or more random accessresponses may comprise an uplink grant indicating one or more uplinkresources granted for the wireless device. The wireless device maytransmit one or more transport blocks (e.g., Msg 3) via the one or moreuplink resources.

An RAR may be in a form of MAC PDU comprising one or more MAC subPDUsand/or optionally padding. FIG. 19A is an example of an RAR. A MACsubheader may be octet aligned. Each MAC subPDU may comprise at leastone of following: a MAC subheader with Backoff Indicator only; a MACsubheader with RAPID only (i.e. acknowledgment for SI request); a MACsubheader with RAPID and MAC RAR. FIG. 19B is an example of a MACsubheader with backoff indicator. For example, a MAC subheader withbackoff indicator comprise one or more header fields, e.g., E/T/R/R/BIas described in FIG. 19B. A MAC subPDU with backoff indicator may beplaced at the beginning of the MAC PDU, for example, if the MAC subPDUcomprises the backoff indicator. MAC subPDU(s) with RAPID only and MACsubPDU(s) with RAPID and MAC RAR may be placed anywhere after MAC subPDUwith Backoff Indicator and, if exist before padding as described in FIG.19A. A MAC subheader with RAPID may comprise one or more header fields,e.g., E/T/RAPID as described in FIG. 19C. Padding may be placed at theend of the MAC PDU if present. Presence and length of padding may beimplicit based on TB size, size of MAC subPDU(s).

In an example one or more header fields in a MAC subheader may indicateas follows: an E field may indicate an extension field that may be aflag indicating if the MAC subPDU including this MAC subheader is thelast MAC subPDU or not in the MAC PDU. The E field may be set to “1” toindicate at least another MAC subPDU follows. The E field may be set to“0” to indicate that the MAC subPDU including this MAC subheader is thelast MAC subPDU in the MAC PDU; a T filed may be a flag indicatingwhether the MAC subheader contains a Random Access Preamble ID or aBackoff Indicator (one or more backoff values may predefined and BI mayindicate one of backoff value). The T field may be set to “0” toindicate the presence of a Backoff Indicator field in the subheader(BI). The T field may be set to “1” to indicate the presence of a RandomAccess Preamble ID field in the subheader (RAPID); an R filed mayindicate a reserved bit that may be set to “0”; a BI field may be abackoff indicator field that identifies the overload condition in thecell. The size of the BI field may be 4 bits; a RAPID field may be aRandom Access Preamble IDentifier field that may identify thetransmitted Random Access Preamble. The MAC subPDU may not comprise aMAC RAR, for example, if the RAPID in the MAC subheader of a MAC subPDUcorresponds to one of the Random Access Preambles configured for SIrequest.

There may be one or more MAC RAR format. At least one of following MACRAR format may be employed in a four-step or a two-step RA procedure.For example, FIG. 20 is an example of one of MAC RAR formats. The MACRAR may be fixed size as depicted in FIG. 20 and may comprise at leastone of the following fields: an R field that may indicate a Reservedbit, set to “0”; a Timing Advance Command field that may indicate theindex value TA employed to control the amount of timing adjustment; a ULGrant field that indicate the resources to be employed on the uplink;and a RNTI field (e.g., Temporary C-RNTI and/or C-RNTI) that mayindicate an identity that is employed during Random Access. For example,for a two-step RA procedure, an RAR may comprise at least one offollowing: a UE contention resolution identity, an RV ID forretransmission of one or more TB s, decoding success or failureindicator of one or more TB transmission, and one or more fields shownin FIG. 20.

There may be a case that a base station may multiplex, in a MAC PDU,RARs for two-step and four-step RA procedures. If RARs for two-step andfour-step RA procedure have the same size, a wireless device may notrequire an RAR length indicator field and/or the wireless device maydetermine the boundary of each RAR in the MAC PDU based onpre-determined RAR size information. For example, FIG. 21 is an exampleRAR format that may be employed in a MAC PDU multiplexing RARs fortwo-step and four-step RA procedures. The RAR shown in FIG. 21 may be afixed size using the same format for two-step and four-step RAprocedures.

In an example, an RAR for a two-step RA procedure may have a differentformat, size, and/or fields, from an RAR for a four-step RA procedure.For example, FIG. 22A, and FIG. 22B are example RAR formats that may beemployed for a two-step RA procedure. If RARs for two-step and four-stepRA procedures are multiplexed into a MAC PDU, and the RARs havedifferent format between two-step and four-step RA procedure, an RAR mayhave a field to indicate a type of RAR (e.g., a reserved “R” field asshown in FIG. 20, FIG. 22A, and FIG. 22B may be employed to indicate atype of RAR). A field for indicating an RAR type may be in a subheader(such as a MAC subheader) or in an RAR. An RAR may comprise differenttypes of fields that may correspond with an indicator in a subheader orin an RAR. A wireless device may determine the boundary of one or moreRARs in a MAC PDU based on one or more indicators.

In an example, a base station may configure a wireless device with oneor more UL carriers associated with one DL carrier of a cell. One of oneor more UL carriers configured with a DL carrier may be referred to as asupplementary uplink (SUL) carrier or a normal UL (NUL or may bereferred to as a non-SUL) carrier. In an example, a base station mayenhance UL coverage and/or capacity by configuring an SUL carrier. Abase station may configure a BWP configuration per an uplink (e.g., peruplink carrier) in a cell. For example, a base station may configure oneor more BWPs on an SUL separately from one or more BWPs on a NUL. A basestation may control an active BWP of an SUL independently of an activeBWP of a NUL. For example, a base station may control two uplinktransmissions on two ULs (e.g., NUL and SUL) to avoid overlapping PUSCHtransmissions in time. For example, SUL and/or NUL may be configured inan unlicensed band. A base station may configure a wireless device withone or more following operations: an SUL in a licensed band and a NUL ina licensed band, an SUL in a licensed band and a NUL in an unlicensedband, an SUL in an unlicensed band and a NUL in a licensed band, and/oran SUL in an unlicensed band and a NUL in an unlicensed band

In an example, a base station may avoid configuring parallel uplinktransmissions via SUL and NUL of a cell, wherein the parallel uplinktransmissions may be PUCCH (and/or PUSCH) via SUL and PUCCH (and/orPUSCH) via NUL. In an example, a base station may transmit one or moreRRC message (e.g., wireless device specific RRC signaling) to (re-)configure a location of a PUCCH on an SUL carrier and/or on a NULcarrier. A base station may transmit, to a wireless device, one or moreRRC messages comprising configuration parameters for a carrier, whereinthe configuration parameters may indicate at least one of random accessprocedure configuration, BWP configurations (e.g., number of DL/UL BWPs,bandwidth and/or index of configured DL/UL BWP, and/or initial, default,and/or active DL/UL BWP), PUSCH configurations, PUCCH configurations,SRS configurations, and/or a power control parameters.

In an example, a base station may configure an SUL carrier and a NULcarrier to support a random access procedure (e.g., initial access). Forexample, as shown in FIG. 12, to support a random access to a cellconfigured with SUL, a base station may configure a RACH configuration1210 of SUL independent of a RACH configuration 1210 of NUL. Forexample, one or more parameters associated with Msg1 1220, Msg 2 1230,Msg 3 1240, and/or contention resolution 1250 via SUL may be configuredindependent of one or more parameters associated with Msg1 1220, Msg 21230, Msg 3 1240, and/or contention resolution 1250 via NUL. Forexample, one or more parameters associated with PRACH transmissions inMsg 1 1220 via SUL may be independent of one or more parametersassociated with PRACH transmission via NUL.

For a random access procedure in an unlicensed band and/or in a licensedband, based on a measurement (e.g., RSRP) of one or more DL pathlossreferences, a wireless device may determine which carrier (e.g., betweenNUL and SUL) to use. For example, a wireless device may select a firstcarrier (e.g., SUL or NUL carrier) if a measured quality (e.g., RSRP) ofDL pathloss references is lower than a broadcast threshold (e.g., an RRCparameter, rsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL in RACH-ConfigCommon). If a wirelessdevice selects a carrier between SUL carrier and NUL carrier for arandom access procedure, one or more uplink transmissions associatedwith the random access procedure may remain on the selected carrier.

In an example, a base station may configure NUL and SUL with a TAG. Forexample, for an uplink transmission of a first carrier (e.g., SUL) of acell, a wireless device may employ a TA value received during a randomaccess procedure via a second carrier (e.g., NUL) of the cell.

FIG. 23 is an example of a coverage of a cell configured with a DL andtwo ULs. For example, a base station may configure a NUL and DL over afirst frequency (e.g., high frequency). An SUL may be configured over asecond frequency (e.g., low frequency) to support uplink transmission(e.g., in terms of coverage and/or capacity) of a cell. In an example, abroadcast threshold (e.g., an RRC parameter, rsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL) fora wireless device to select a carrier may be determined such that awireless device located outside a NUL coverage 2310 but inside an SULcoverage 2320 may start a random access procedure via an SUL. A wirelessdevice located inside a NUL coverage 2310 may start a random accessprocedure via a NUL. A wireless device may employ a RACH configurationassociated with a selected carrier for a random access procedure.

In an example, a wireless device may perform a contention based randomaccess procedure and/or a contention free random access procedure. In anexample, a wireless device may perform a random access procedure on anUL selected based on a broadcast threshold (e.g.,rsrp-ThresholdSSB-SUL). For example, this is a case when a base stationdoes not indicate (e.g., explicitly) the wireless device which carrierto start a random access procedure. In an example, a base station mayindicate which carrier a wireless device performs a random accessprocedure by transmitting a RACH configuration with an SUL indicator(e.g., 0 may indicates a NUL carrier, 1 may indicate an SUL carrier orvice versa). In an example, a base station may indicate (e.g.,explicitly) to a wireless device which UL carrier to be employed for acontention free or contention based random access procedure. In anexample, a base station may indicate a contention free random accessprocedure by transmitting a RACH configuration with a dedicated preambleindex. In an example, a base station may indicate a contention basedrandom access procedure by transmitting a RACH configuration without adedicated preamble index.

In an example, it may be beneficial for a network to receive one or moremeasurements of NUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s) to initiate a(contention free or contention based) random access procedure for awireless device. For example, a base station may configure a wirelessdevice (e.g., a wireless device in RRC Connected) with one or moremeasurements on one or more DL reference signals associated with NULcarrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s) of a cell.

For example, if a wireless device transmits quality information of oneor more measurements on one or more DL reference signals associated withNUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s), a base station may select acarrier between NUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s) based on thequality of the one or more measurements. A base station may indicate, toa wireless device, a selected carrier via RRC signaling (e.g., handover)and/or PDCCH order (e.g., SCell addition) for initiating a (contentionfree or contention based) random access procedure. In an example, e.g.,for load balancing between NUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s), a basestation may select one of NUL and SUL carrier by taking intoconsideration congestion in NUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s). Forexample, based on one or more measurement reports associated with NULcarrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s), a base station may better select acarrier (e.g., NUL or SUL) of a target cell for a (contention free orcontention based) random access procedure for a handover. For example,based on one or more measurement reports associated with NUL carrier(s)and/or SUL carrier(s), a base station may better select a carrier (e.g.,NUL or SUL) of an SCell (e.g., when the SCell is configured with atleast a NUL carrier and an SUL carrier) for a (contention free orcontention based) random access procedure for an SCell addition.

In an example, for a handover of a wireless device, a source basestation may make a decision on a handover to one or more target cells. Asource base station may indicate a handover decision to a target basestation associated with one or more target cells that the source basestation selects. A target base station may indicate to a wireless device(e.g., through a cell of a source base station) which carrier (betweenNUL carrier(s) and SUL carrier(s)) to use via a handover command. Forexample, a handover command received by a wireless device may comprisean SUL indicator (e.g., 1 bit) along with one or more RACH parameters(e.g., dedicated preamble index, and/or PRACH mask index), wherein theSUL indicator may indicate if the one or more RACH parameters areassociated with an SUL or NUL carrier.

For example, it may be useful that a source base station informs atarget base station about measured results on NUL carrier(s) and SULcarrier(s), e.g., high frequency carrier(s) and low frequencycarrier(s), so that the target base station determines a carrier onwhich a wireless device may perform a (contention free or contentionbased) random access procedure for a handover. In an example, when asource base station configures DL measurements on one or more cellsassociation with a NUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s) of a target basestation, the source base station may need to know whether SUL carrier(s)is (are) configured in the target base station, and/or which carrier isallowed to be employed for a handover. For example, a target basestation may inform a source base station of one or more configurationsof NUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s) of one or more cells in thetarget base station. A source base station may configure DL measurementon one or more cells in the target base station, based on one or moreconfigurations indicating carrier configurations at the one or morecells in the target base station.

In an example, for an SCell addition, a base station may determinewhether SUL carrier(s) is (are) configured in an SCell, and/or whichcarrier is allowed to be employed for an SCell addition. A base stationmay configure DL measurements on NUL carrier(s) and/or SUL carrier(s). Abase station may configure a wireless device with one or more RACHconfigurations for an SCell, e.g., a first RACH configuration for an SULcarrier, a second RACH configuration for a NUL carrier, and so on. Abase station may transmit, to a wireless device via a PDCCH ordercomprising a parameter indicating in which carrier the wireless devicestarts a (contention free or contention based) random access procedure.For example, a PDCCH order triggering a (contention free or contentionbased) random access procedure may comprise one or more parametersindicating at least one of at least one preamble (e.g., preamble index),one or more PRACH resources (e.g., PRACH mask index), an SUL indicator,and/or a BWP indicator. For example, for an random access procedure, awireless device receiving a PDCCH order may transmit at least onepreamble via one or more PRACH resources of a BWP indicated by a BWPindicator of a carrier indicated by an SUL indicator.

In an example, a wireless device may determine a random access procedureunsuccessfully completed. For example, if a wireless device receives noRAR corresponding to one or more preambles transmitted by the wirelessdevice during a random access procedure, the wireless device mayconsider the random access procedure unsuccessfully completed. There maybe a number of preamble transmissions allowed during a random accessprocedure (e.g., preambleTransMax in RACH-ConfigGeneric), wherein thenumber of preamble transmissions may be semi-statically configured byRRC. For example, if a wireless device receives no RAR corresponding tothe number of preamble transmissions, the wireless device may consider arandom access procedure unsuccessfully completed. In response to anunsuccessful completion of a random access procedure, a wireless devicemay indicate a problem to upper layer(s), wherein, in response to theindicated problem, the upper layers(s) may trigger radio link failurethat may lead to prolonged random access delay and degraded userexperience.

For example, a base station (source base station and/or a target basestation) configuring a wireless device with a RACH configuration for arandom access (for a handover and/or SCell addition) may not allow toreuse the RACH configuration if the random access is unsuccessfullycompleted.

The amount of data traffic carried over cellular networks is expected toincrease for many years to come. The number of users/devices isincreasing, and each user/device accesses an increasing number andvariety of services, e.g. video delivery, large files, images. Thisrequires not only high capacity in the network, but also provisioningvery high data rates to meet customers' expectations on interactivityand responsiveness. More spectrum is therefore needed for cellularoperators to meet the increasing demand. Considering user expectationsof high data rates along with seamless mobility, it is beneficial thatmore spectrum be made available for deploying macro cells as well assmall cells for cellular systems.

Striving to meet the market demands, there has been increasing interestfrom operators in deploying some complementary access utilizingunlicensed spectrum to meet the traffic growth. This is exemplified bythe large number of operator-deployed Wi-Fi networks and the 3GPPstandardization of interworking solutions with Wi-Fi, e.g., LTE/WLANinterworking. This interest indicates that unlicensed spectrum, whenpresent, may be an effective complement to licensed spectrum forcellular operators to help addressing the traffic explosion in somescenarios, such as hotspot areas. For example, in a legacy system (e.g.,LTE), licensed assisted access (LAA) and/or new radio on unlicensedband(s) (NR-U) may offer an alternative for operators to make use ofunlicensed spectrum while managing one radio network, thus offering newpossibilities for optimizing the network's efficiency.

In an example embodiment, Listen-before-talk (LBT) may be implementedfor transmission in a cell configured in unlicensed band (referred to asa LAA cell and/or a NR-U cell for the sake of convenience, for example,an LAA cell and NR-U cell may be interchangeable and may refer any celloperating in unlicensed band. The cell may be operated as non-standalonewith an anchor cell in a licensed band or standalone without an anchorcell in licensed band). The LBT may comprise a clear channel assessment.For example, in an LBT procedure, equipment may apply a clear channelassessment (CCA) check before using the channel. For example, the CCAcomprise at least energy detection that determines the presence (e.g.,channel is occupied) or absence (e.g., channel is clear) of othersignals on a channel. A regulation of a country may impact on the LBTprocedure. For example, European and Japanese regulations mandate theusage of LBT in the unlicensed bands, for example in 5 GHz unlicensedband. Apart from regulatory requirements, carrier sensing via LBT may beone way for fair sharing of the unlicensed spectrum.

In an example embodiment, discontinuous transmission on an unlicensedcarrier with limited maximum transmission duration may be enabled. Someof these functions may be supported by one or more signals to betransmitted from the beginning of a discontinuous downlink transmissionin the unlicensed band Channel reservation may be enabled by thetransmission of signals, by an NR-U node, after or in response togaining channel access based on a successful LBT operation. Other nodesmay receive the signals (e.g., transmitted for the channel reservation)with an energy level above a certain threshold that may sense thechannel to be occupied. Functions that may need to be supported by oneor more signals for operation in unlicensed band with discontinuousdownlink transmission may comprise one or more of the following:detection of the downlink transmission in unlicensed band (includingcell identification) by wireless devices; time and frequencysynchronization of a wireless devices.

In an example embodiment, DL transmission and frame structure design foran operation in unlicensed band may employ subframe, (mini-)slot, and/orsymbol boundary alignment according to carrier aggregation timingrelationships across serving cells aggregated by CA. This may not implythat the base station transmissions start at the subframe, (mini-)slot,and/or symbol boundary. Unlicensed cell operation (e.g., LAA and/orNR-U) may support transmitting PDSCH, for example, when not all OFDMsymbols are available for transmission in a subframe according to LBT.Delivery of necessary control information for the PDSCH may besupported.

An LBT procedure may be employed for fair and friendly coexistence of3GPP system (e.g., LTE and/or NR) with other operators and technologiesoperating in unlicensed spectrum. For example, a node attempting totransmit on a carrier in unlicensed spectrum may perform a clear channelassessment (e.g., as a part of one or more LBT procedures) to determineif the channel is free for use. An LBT procedure may involve at leastenergy detection to determine if the channel is being used. For example,regulatory requirements in some regions, e.g., in Europe, specify anenergy detection threshold such that if a node receives energy greaterthan this threshold, the node assumes that the channel is not free.While nodes may follow such regulatory requirements, a node mayoptionally use a lower threshold for energy detection than thatspecified by regulatory requirements. A radio access technology (e.g.,LTE and/or NR) may employ a mechanism to adaptively change the energydetection threshold. For example, NR-U may employ a mechanism toadaptively lower the energy detection threshold from an upper bound.Adaptation mechanism may not preclude static or semi-static setting ofthe threshold. In an example Category 4 LBT (CAT4 LBT) mechanism orother type of LBT mechanisms may be implemented.

Various example LBT mechanisms may be implemented. In an example, forsome signals, in some implementation scenarios, in some situations,and/or in some frequencies no LBT procedure may be performed by thetransmitting entity. In an example, Category 1 (CAT1, e.g., no LBT) maybe implemented in one or more cases. For example, a channel inunlicensed band may be hold by a first device (e.g., a base station forDL transmission), and a second device (e.g., a wireless device) takesover the for a transmission without performing the CAT1 LBT. In anexample, Category 2 (CAT2, e.g. LBT without random back-off and/orone-shot LBT) may be implemented. The duration of time determining thatthe channel is idle may be deterministic (e.g., by a regulation). A basestation may transmit an uplink grant indicating a type of LBT (e.g.,CAT2 LBT) to a wireless device. CAT1 LBT and CAT2 LBT may be employedfor COT sharing. For example, a base station (a wireless device) maytransmit an uplink grant (resp. uplink control information) comprising atype of LBT. For example, CAT1 LBT and/or CAT2 LBT in the uplink grant(or uplink control information) may indicate, to a receiving device(e.g., a base station, and/or a wireless device) to trigger COT sharing.In an example, Category 3 (CAT3, e.g. LBT with random back-off with acontention window of fixed size) may be implemented. The LBT proceduremay have the following procedure as one of its components. Thetransmitting entity may draw a random number N within a contentionwindow. The size of the contention window may be specified by theminimum and maximum value of N. The size of the contention window may befixed. The random number N may be employed in the LBT procedure todetermine the duration of time that the channel is sensed to be idlebefore the transmitting entity transmits on the channel. In an example,Category 4 (CAT4, e.g. LBT with random back-off with a contention windowof variable size) may be implemented. The transmitting entity may draw arandom number N within a contention window. The size of contentionwindow may be specified by the minimum and maximum value of N. Thetransmitting entity may vary the size of the contention window whendrawing the random number N. The random number N may be used in the LBTprocedure to determine the duration of time that the channel is sensedto be idle before the transmitting entity transmits on the channel.

In an unlicensed band, a type of LBT (CAT1, CAT2, CAT3, and/or CAT4) maybe configured via control messages (RRC, MAC CE, and/or DCI) per a cell.In an example, a type of LBT (CAT1, CAT2, CAT3, and/or CAT4) may beconfigured via control messages (RRC, MAC CE, and/or DCI) per BWP. Forexample, a type of LBT (CAT1, CAT2, CAT3, and/or CAT4) may be determinedat least based on a numerology configured in a BWP. In this case, BWPswitching may change a type of LBT.

In an example, a wireless device may employ uplink (UL) LBT. The UL LBTmay be different from a downlink (DL) LBT (e.g. by using different LBTmechanisms or parameters) for example, since the NR-U UL may be based onscheduled access which affects a wireless device's channel contentionopportunities. Other considerations motivating a different UL LBTcomprise, but are not limited to, multiplexing of multiple wirelessdevices in a subframe (slot, and/or mini-slot).

In an example, DL transmission burst(s) may be a continuous (unicast,multicast, broadcast, and/or combination thereof) transmission by a basestation (e.g., to one or more wireless devices) on a carrier component(CC). UL transmission burst(s) may be a continuous transmission from oneor more wireless devices to a base station on a CC. In an example, DLtransmission burst(s) and UL transmission burst(s) on a CC in anunlicensed spectrum may be scheduled in a TDM manner over the sameunlicensed carrier. Switching between DL transmission burst(s) and ULtransmission burst(s) may require an LBT (e.g., CAT1 LBT, CAT2 LBT, CAT3LBT, and/or CAT4 LBT). For example, an instant in time may be part of aDL transmission burst and/or an UL transmission burst.

Channel occupancy time (COT) sharing may be employed in a radio accesstechnology (e.g., LTE and or NR). COT sharing may be a mechanism thatone or more wireless devices share a channel that is sensed as idle byat least one of the one or more wireless devices. For example, one ormore first devices occupy a channel an LBT (e.g., the channel is sensedas idle based on CAT4 LBT) and one or more second devices shares itusing an LBT (e.g., 25 us LBT) within a maximum COT (MCOT) limit. Forexample, the MOCT limit may be given per priority class, logical channelpriority, and/or wireless device specific. COT sharing may allow aconcession for UL in unlicensed band. For example, a base station maytransmit an uplink grant to a wireless device for a UL transmission. Forexample, a base station may occupy a channel and transmit, to one ormore wireless devices a control signal indicating that the one or morewireless devices may use the channel. For example, the control signalmay comprise an uplink grant and/or a particular LBT type (e.g., CAT1LBT and/or CAT2 LBT). The one or more wireless device may determine COTsharing based at least on the uplink grant and/or the particular LBTtype. The wireless device may perform UL transmission(s) with dynamicgrant and/or configured grant (e.g., Type 1, Type2, autonomous UL) witha particular LBT (e.g., CAT2 LBT such as 25 us LBT) in the configuredperiod, for example, if a COT sharing is triggered. A COT sharing may betriggered by a wireless device. For example, a wireless deviceperforming UL transmission(s) based on a configured grant (e.g., Type 1,Type2, autonomous UL) may transmit an uplink control informationindicating the COT sharing (UL-DL switching within a (M)COT). A startingtime of DL transmission(s) in the COT sharing triggered by a wirelessdevice may be indicated by one or more ways. For example, one or moreparameters in the uplink control information indicate the starting time.For example, resource configuration(s) of configured grant(s)configured/activated by a base station may indicate the starting time.For example, a base station may be allowed to perform DL transmission(s)after or in response to UL transmission(s) on the configured grant(e.g., Type 1, Type 2, and/or autonomous UL). There may be a delay(e.g., at least 4 ms) between the uplink grant and the UL transmission.The delay may be predefined, semi-statically configured (via an RRCmessage) by a base station, and/or dynamically indicated (e.g., via anuplink grant) by a base station. The delay may not be accounted in theCOT duration.

In an example, one or more DL to UL and UL to DL switching within ashared COT may be supported. Example LBT requirements to support one ormore switching points, may comprise: for gap of less than a firstthreshold (e.g., 16 us): no-LBT may be used; for gap of above the firstthreshold (e.g., 16 us) but does not exceed a second threshold (e.g., 25us): one-shot LBT may be employed; for single switching point, for thegap from DL transmission to UL transmission exceeds the second threshold(e.g., 25 us): one-shot LBT may be employed; for multiple switchingpoints, for the gap from DL transmission to UL transmission exceeds thesecond threshold (e.g., 25 us), one-shot LBT may be employed.

In an example, a signal that facilitates its detection with lowcomplexity may be useful for wireless device power saving; Improvedcoexistence; Spatial reuse at least within the same operator network,serving cell transmission burst acquisition, etc. In an example, a radioaccess technology (e.g., LTE and/or NR) may employ a signal comprisingat least SS/PBCH block burst set transmission. Other channels andsignals may be transmitted together as part of the signal. In anexample, the signal may be a discovery reference signal (DRS). There maybe no gap within a time span that the signal is transmitted at leastwithin a beam. In an example, a gap may be defined for beam switching.In an example, the same interlace structure for PUCCH and PUSCH may beused. In an example, interlaced based PRACH may be used.

In an example, initial active DL/UL BWP may be approximately 20 MHz fora first unlicensed band, e.g., in a 5 GHz unlicensed band. An initialactive DL/UL BWP in one or more unlicensed bands may be similar (e.g.,approximately 20 MHz in a 5 GHz and/or 6 GHz unlicensed spectrum), forexample, if similar channelization is used in the one or more unlicensedbands (e.g., by a regulation). For a wideband case, a base station mayconfigure the wideband with one or more BWP. For example, for 80 MHzcase, a base station may configure four BWPs; each BWP may be configuredwith about 20 MHz. An active BWP (DL and/or UL) may be switched one toanother at least based on BWP switching mechanism. For example, a basestation may configure the wideband with one or more subbands. Forexample, for 80 MHz case, a base station may configure four subbands;each subband may be configured with about 20 MHz. For example, awireless device may perform an LBT subband by subband, and may transmitdata via scheduled resources on one or more subbands where the LBTindicates idle.

In an example, HARQ acknowledge (A: ACK) and negative acknowledge (N:NACK) for the corresponding data may be transmitted in a shared COT(e.g., with a CAT2 LBT). In some examples, the HARQ A/N may betransmitted in a separate COT (e.g., the separate COT may require a CAT4LBT). In an example, when UL HARQ feedback is transmitted on unlicensedband, a radio access technology (e.g., LTE and/or NR) may supportflexible triggering and multiplexing of HARQ feedback for one or more DLHARQ processes. HARQ process information may be defined independent oftiming (e.g., time and/or frequency resource) of transmission. In anexample, UCI on PUSCH may carry HARQ process ID, NDI, RVID. In anexample, Downlink Feedback Information (DFI) may be used fortransmission of HARQ feedback for configured grant.

In an example, contention-based random access (CBRA) and/orcontention-free random access (CFRA) may be supported on SpCell. CFRAmay be supported on SCells. In an example, an RAR may be transmitted viaSpCell, e.g., non-standalone scenario. In an example, an RAR may betransmitted via SpCell and/or SCell, e.g., standalone scenario. In anexample, a predefined HARQ process ID for an RAR.

In an example, carrier aggregation between PCell configured on alicensed band and SCell configured on unlicensed band may be supported.In an example, SCell may have both DL and UL, or DL-only. In an example,dual connectivity between PCell (e.g., LTE cell) configured on alicensed band and PSCell (e.g., NR-U cell) configured on unlicensed bandmay be supported. In an example, Stand-alone operation on an unlicensedband, where all carriers are in one or more unlicensed bands, may besupported. In an example, a cell with DL in unlicensed band and UL in alicensed band or vice versa may be supported. In an example, dualconnectivity between PCell (e.g., NR cell) on a licensed band and PSCell(e.g., NR-U cell) on unlicensed band may be supported.

In an example, a radio access technology (e.g., LTE and/or NR) operatingbandwidth may be an integer multiple of 20 MHz, for example, if absenceof Wi-Fi cannot be guaranteed (e.g. by regulation) in an unlicensed band(e.g., 5 GHz, 6 GHZ, and/or sub-7 GHz) where the radio access technology(e.g., LTE and/or NR) is operating, In an example, a wireless device mayperform one or more LBTs in units of 20 MHz. In an example, receiverassisted LBT (e.g., RTS/CTS type mechanism) and/or on-demand receiverassisted LBT (e.g., for example receiver assisted LBT enabled only whenneeded) may be employed. In an example, techniques to enhance spatialreuse may be used.

In an example, wideband carrier with more than one channels (e.g.,subbands) is supported on in an unlicensed band. In an example, theremay be one active BWP in a carrier. In an example, a BWP with one ormore channels may be activated. In an example, when absence of Wi-Ficannot be guaranteed (e.g. by regulation), LBT may be performed in unitsof 20 MHz. In this case, there may be multiple parallel LBT proceduresfor this BWP. The actual transmission bandwidth may be subject tosubband with LBT success, which may result in dynamic bandwidthtransmission within this active wideband BWP.

Channel congestion may cause an LBT failure. For example, theprobability of successful LBT may be increased for random access and/orfor data transmission, for example, if the wireless device selects thecell/BWP/channel with lowest congestion load. For example, channeloccupancy aware RACH procedure may be considered to reduce LBT failure.For example, the random access backoff time for the wireless device maybe adjusted based on channel conditions (e.g., based on channeloccupancy and/or RSSI measurements). For example, a base station may(semi-statically and/or dynamically) transmit a random access backoff.For example, the random access backoff may be predefined. For example,the random access backoff may be incremented after or in response to oneor more random access response reception failures corresponding to oneor more random access preamble attempts.

A base station may transmit a SS/PBCH burst set in one contiguous burst.For example, DRS transmission may comprise SS/PBCH burst set in onecontiguous burst. The base station may transmit one or more CSI-RS sand/or the remaining minimum system information (RMSI)-CORESET(s) and/orthe PDSCH(s) carrying RMSI associated with the SS/PBCH block(s) in thecontiguous burst (e.g., DRS transmission). A base station may transmitone or more messages/signals comprising the SS/PBCH burst, theCSI-RS(s), the RMSI-CORESET(s), and/or the PDSCH(s) carrying RMSI in oneburst in time domain that results in limiting the required number ofchannel access and short channel occupancy in an unlicensed band. Aradio access technology (e.g., LTE and/or NR) may support a stand-aloneoperation and/or dual-connectivity deployments.

A base station (e.g., deployed in an unlicensed band) may transmit DRScomprising signals and/or channels that are required for cellacquisition. For example, the DRS may comprise the transmission of atleast one of reference signals, paging and/or OSI signals. In somescenario and/or radio access technology, a base station may not transmitat least one of following signal(s)/channel(s) in the DRS: RMSI-CORESET,PDSCH and/or CSI-RS

The base station may transmit a DRS within a duration of a DRStransmission window. The DRS transmission window may have a fixed length(e.g. 5 ms) and/or a fixed periodicity (e.g. 20 ms). The length and/orthe periodicity of the DRS transmission window may be semi-staticallyconfigured by a base station. For example, a duration of the DRS (e.g.,comprising SS/PBCH blocks and other multiplex signals/channels)transmitted within the DRS transmission window, may be limited to aparticular time duration (e.g., 1 ms). For example, the duration of theDRS within the window may be limited depending on the periodicity ofDRS. The base station may transmit one or more message indicating anumber of candidate SSB positions within DRS transmission window, e.g.up to 64. The base station may transmit a number of SSBs within DRStransmission window, e.g. up to 8. The transmitted SSBs within the DRSwindow may not overlap in time domain.

Transmission(s) of SS/PBCH block(s) may not be guaranteed (or may beblocked, cancel, rescheduled, postponed, and/or delayed) in unlicensedband due to LBT failure. In an example, one or more SS/PBCH blocks maybe dropped at certain time instances due to LBT failure. Predefinedtransmission position of SS/PBCH block(s) may be in efficient. There maybe a need to opportunistically schedule one or more SS/PBCH block(s),e.g., depending on a success and/or failure of LBT performed on achannel in an unlicensed band. For example, one or more SS/PBCH bursts(e.g., an entire SS/PBCH burst set) may be shifted in time to the nexttransmission instance. For example, a start of a SS/PBCH burst may betruncated and one or more dropped SSB (e.g., due to the truncation) maybe cyclically wrapped at the end of the burst set transmission. Forexample, the network may schedule one or more SSBs and transmit amessage indicating the timing information of scheduled one or more SSBs.For example, SS/PBCH block transmission occasion time index and theassociated SS/PBCH block index may be indicated in the SS/PBCH block toallow the wireless device to derive the timing information.

The base station may determine a COT duration for SS/PBCH bursttransmission. The COT duration may be determined at least based on asubcarrier spacing of the SS/PBCH burst transmission and/or a number ofSS/PBCH blocks in the burst transmission. In an example, the basestation may use CAT2 LBT for the SS/PBCH burst transmission, forexample, that may provide a short COT of 1 ms. A type of LBT may bedetermined based on priorities. In an example, a base station may usehigher priority CAT4 LBT with shorter random backoff, which may providea short COT of 2 ms. In an example, the base station may use lowerpriority CAT4 LBT with longer random backoff, which may provide longerCOT, e.g., up to 10 ms.

Semi-static resource allocation of PRACH may be supported as baselinedesign in a radio access technology (e.g., LTE and/or NR). A basestation may semi-statically configure a wireless device with anassociation between one or more PRACH occasions/preambles and SS/PBCHblock(s). For example, the base station may configure the wirelessdevice with a number of SS/PBCH blocks associated with one PRACHoccasion based on one or more higher layer parameters. A value ofconfigured number of SS/PBCH blocks associated with one PRACH occasionmay be smaller or larger than one. For example, one SS/PBCH block may bemapped to multiple (e.g., consecutive) PRACH occasions, or vice versa. Abase station may support a mapping from different SS/PBCH blocks tonon-overlapping subsets of RACH preamble indices within one PRACHoccasion, for example, if more than one SS/PBCH blocks are mapped to onePRACH occasion.

One or more PRACH periodicities may be supported, e.g., 10, 20, 40, 60,and 160 ms. A wireless device may not wait until the next configuredPRACH occasion without transmitting RACH preamble, for example, if thewireless device determines an LBT failure.

There may be one or more enhancements implemented in a radio accesstechnology (e.g., LTE and/or NR) for an operation in an unlicensed band.In an example, one or more transmission opportunities for PRACH may beconfigured in time, frequency, code, and/or combination thereof. Forexample, a base station may configure a wireless device with one or morePRACH resources across one or more LBT sub-bands/carriers, for example,for contention-free and/or contention-based RA. In the time domain, abase station may configure a wireless device with one or more PRACHresources dynamically, e.g., via DCI for connected mode wireless device.For example, PRACH resources configured to a wireless device maycomprise one or more first PRACH resources dynamically configured (e.g.,via DCI) and/or one or more second PRACH resource semi-staticallyconfigured (e.g., via an RRC message). For example, a base station maydynamically configure one or more PRACH resources within a COT where thebase station transmits one or more SSBs. For example, the one or morePRACH resources may be dynamically scheduled e.g., via paging for idlemode wireless device and/or via DCI (or any control signal) for aconnected mode wireless device. For example, the one or more RACHresources may follow one or more SSBs (e.g., DRS transmission).

A wireless device may transmit one or more preambles. For example, theone or more preambles may be limited before reception of a random accessresponse (e.g., Msg2) in RAR window. For example, the one or morepreambles may be allowed before starting an RAR window. For example, thenumber of allowed preamble transmissions may be predefined or indicatedby a message e.g., RMSI in an RRC message and/or PDCCH order in a DLcontrol signal. In an example, group wise SSB-to-RO mapping may besupported, e.g., by frequency first-time second manner, where groupingis in time domain.

A wireless device may perform LBT for accessing a channel beforetransmitting PRACH in an unlicensed band. The wireless device maytransmit the PRACH, for example, if the channel is free. The wirelessdevice may postpone the PRACH transmission, for example, if the channelis busy. A base station may reserve a time duration for the wirelessdevice before transmitting PRACH to perform LBT, e.g., an LBT gap forRACH occasion (RO). The base station may schedule RACH occasions afteror in response to a SS/PBCH burst transmission. Scheduling ROs after orin response to the SS/PBCH burst transmission may help a wireless deviceto avoid LBT failure for the RACH transmission(s). The wireless devicemay assume no interference and/or no hidden nodes after or in responseto detecting SS/PBCH block. The wireless device may skip an LBT andtransmit PRACH in response to a reception of at least one SSB. Thewireless device may transmit at least one preamble without LBT (or withperforming a particular LBT, e.g., CAT2 LBT), for example, if the gapbetween DL/UL switching point (e.g., between an SSB reception andselected RACH resource) is small.

The base station may configure a wireless device with an associationbetween (e.g., SSB-to-RO mapping) SS/PBCH blocks and RACH. For example,a base station may transmit an RRC message indicating the SSB-to-ROmapping that may be time independent. For example, the RRC message mayindicate a frequency resource and/or preamble of a PRACH transmission.The base station may transmit a second message indicating a timeresource of the PRACH transmission. The network may supportcontention-free and contention-based random access procedures on SCells.A base station may transmit a random access response (RAR) on an SCellwhere the base station may receive a preamble. A base station maytransmit a random access response (RAR) on an SCell where a base stationdoes not receive a preamble, e.g., with a cell identifier where the basestation receives the preamble.

A base station may share an acquired COT with a wireless device forrandom access procedure. The base station may allow the wireless deviceto multiplex PRACH resources in UL portion of an acquired COT. Forexample, the base station may transmit, to one or more wireless device,an indication via a group-common PDCCH (GC-PDCCH) to schedule PRACHresources within the acquired COT, e.g., for connected, inactive, and/oridle mode wireless device(s). In an example, the base station maytransmit the PDCCH (e.g., GC-PDCCH) to schedule resources after one ormore SSBs (e.g., in an RMSI and/or in a DCI). In an example, thewireless device may perform one-shot (CAT2) LBT or no LBT for randomaccess preamble (Msg1) and Msg3 transmission in the COT acquired by thebase station, for example, the wireless device receives the indication.

A wireless device may share a COT with a base station, for example, whenthe wireless device acquires the COT, for example, based on CAT4 LBT.For example, the wireless device may acquire the COT for Msg1 and/orMsg3 transmission(s). The base station may perform one-shot (CAT2) LBTor no LBT before Msg2 and Msg4 transmission in the COT. For a two-stepRA procedure, a wireless device may acquire the COT for MsgA (e.g.,preamble(s), and/or UL data) transmission. The base station may performone-shot (CAT2) LBT or no LBT before MsgB (e.g., RAR(s) and/orcontention resolution) transmission in the COT

A base station may configure one or more wireless devices to share oneor more RACH resources. The one or more wireless devices may block eachother, for example, if the one or more wireless devices transmit one ormore preambles without UL synchronization in the same RACH resource. Forexample, a preamble transmission time may vary between wireless devices,for example, if the wireless devices are not UL-synchronized, and/or ifthe wireless devices select different values of backoff timers. The basestation may perform an LBT to reserve RACH resources. The RACH resourcesmay be within the base-station-initiated COT. The channel prior to theRACH resource may be occupied by the base station. The wireless devicemay assume that the channel is reserved by the base station for RACHtransmission and may skip LBT, for example when the channel prior to theRACH resource is occupied by the serving base station, and/or the RACHresource is within the COT of the base station. The base station mayindicate the above information to the wireless device, for example usingan initial signal. The initial signal may comprise COT sharingindication.

The base station may perform an LBT and transmit a polling indication toone or more wireless devices, for example, in response to a success ofthe LBT. The one or more wireless devices may transmit one or morepreambles with for example, one-shot (CAT2) LBT or with a high priorityCAT4 LBT performed in response to receiving the polling indication. Oneor more PRACH occasions may follow the polling indication in the COTthat a base station acquired. The wireless device may be configured totransmit a preamble (e.g., Msg1) with a particular LBT (e.g., one-shotLBT) after or in response to receiving the polling indication from thebase station. For example, a reception of the polling indication may bea reference time of one or more preamble transmissions for the one ormore wireless devices. A base station may configure one or more wirelessdevices to transmit at least one preamble (e.g., Msg1) without LBT orwith a particular LBT after or in response to receiving the pollingindication (e.g., being polled by the base station).

In an example, one or more active BWPs may be supported. To improve theBWP utilization efficiency, the BWP bandwidth may be the same as thebandwidth of subband for LBT, e.g., LBT may be carried out on each BWP.The network may activate/deactivate the BWPs based on data volume to betransmitted.

In an example, one or more non-overlapped BWPs may be activated for awireless device within a wide component carrier, which may be similar ascarrier aggregation. To improve the BWP utilization efficiency, the BWPbandwidth may be the same as the bandwidth of subband for LBT, i.e. LBTmay be a carrier out on each BWP. When more than one subband LBTsuccess, it requires a wireless device to have the capability to supportone or more narrow RF or a wide RF which may comprise the one or moreactivated BWPs.

In an example, a single wideband BWP may be activated for a wirelessdevice within a component carrier. The bandwidth of wideband BWP may bein the unit of subband for LBT. For example, if the subband for LBT is20 MHz in 5 GHz band, the wideband BWP bandwidth may comprise multiple20 MHz. The actual transmission bandwidth may be subject to subband withLBT success, which may result in dynamic bandwidth transmission withinthis active wideband BWP.

In an example, active BWP switching may be achieved by use of schedulingDCI. In an example, the network may indicate to a wireless device a newactive BWP to use for an upcoming, and any subsequent, datatransmission/reception. In an example, a wireless device may monitormultiple, configured BWPs to determine which has been acquired for DLtransmissions by the base station. For example, a wireless device may beconfigured with monitoring occasion periodicity and offset for eachconfigured BWP. The wireless device may attempt to determine if a BWPhas been acquired by the base station during those monitoring occasions.In an example, upon determining that the channel is acquired, thewireless device may continue with that BWP as its active BWP, at leastuntil indicated otherwise or Maximum Channel Occupancy Time (MCOT) hasbeen reached. In an example, when a wireless device has determined thata BWP is active, it may attempt blind detection of PDCCH in configuredCORESETs and it might also perform measurements on aperiodic or periodicresources (e.g., Type 1 or Type 2 configured grant).

A base station may configure a wireless device with a carrieraggregation with at least one SCell operating in an unlicensed band. Aconfigured set of serving cells for the wireless device may comprise atleast one SCell operating in the unlicensed band according to aparticular frame structure (e.g., frame structure Type 3 in LTE).

In an unlicensed band, a failure of a random access may occur due toLBT. For example, in an unlicensed band, at least one LBT may beperformed prior to DL and/or UL transmission. For example, in a randomaccess procedure in FIG. 12, Msg 1 1220, Msg 2 1230, Msg 3 1240, andcontention resolution 1250 may require at least one LBT before thetransmission for contention based random access, e.g., at least 4 LBTs.For contention-free case, Msg 1 1220 and Msg2 1230 may require at leastone LBT, e.g., at least 2 LBTs.

FIG. 24 is an example diagram of contention based and contention-freerandom access procedures with LBT. In an example, a base station and/ora wireless device may not transmit a message (e.g., Msg 1 2420, Msg 22430, Msg 3 2440, and contention resolution 2450) for a random accessprocedure if LBT is failed prior to transmitting the message, e.g., CCAin LBT determines that a channel in unlicensed band is busy (occupied byanother device). In an example, a failure of LBT may result in degradinga user experience (e.g., in terms of QoS, capacity (throughput), and/orcoverage). For example, a base station and/or a wireless device may waituntil the channel becomes idle. This may result in a latency problem tomake a radio link connection between a base station and a wirelessdevice. For example, a failure of an LBT during a random accessprocedure may lead a long delay for a wireless device to receive an ULgrant and/or TA value from a base station. This may result in a calldrop and/or traffic congestion. For example, a failure of an LBT in arandom access procedure for an SCell addition may lead a cell congestion(e.g., load imbalancing) on one or more existing cells, e.g., since anSCell may not take over traffic from the one or more existing cells intime.

In an example, there may be a need to improve an efficiency of randomaccess procedure operating in unlicensed band, e.g., to compensate alatency/delay, and/or performance degradation, due to the LBT failure.For example, selecting two or more SSBs and performing one or more LBTson one or more PRACH occasions associated with the two or more SSBs myincrease a success rate of LBT. For example, a wireless device maymeasure a plurality of downlink reference signals (SSBs or CSI-RS s).The wireless device may select two or more SSBs by comparing RSRPs ofthe plurality of downlink reference signals and a threshold. Forexample, the threshold may comprise rsrp-ThresholdSSB when the pluralityof downlink reference signals are SSBs. For example, the threshold maycomprise rsrp-ThresholdCSI-RS when the plurality of downlink referencesignals are CSI-RS s. For example, the wireless device may select two ormore downlink referencing signals (SSBs or CSI-RS s) whose RSRPs arehigher than the threshold. For example, if SSBs are configured with thewireless device, the wireless device may determine one or more PRACHoccasions associated with the selected two or more downlink referencesignals, e.g., SSBs. For example, the wireless device may determine theone or more PRACH based on an association between PRACH occasions andSSBs that may be indicated by one or more RRC parameters, e.g.,ra-ssb-OccasionMaskIndex. For example, if CSI-RSs are configured withthe wireless device, the wireless device may determine one or more PRACHoccasions associated with the selected two or more downlink referencesignals, e.g., CSI-RSs. For example, the wireless device may determinethe one or more PRACH based on an association between PRACH occasionsand CSI-RS s that may be indicated by one or more RRC parameters, e.g.,ra-OccasionList.

In an example, a two-step RA procedure may employ LBT in an unlicensedband. FIG. 25 is an example diagram of a two-step RA procedure with LBT.A base station and/or a wireless device may not transmit a message(e.g., two-step Msg 1 2520, preamble 2530, one or more transport blocks2540, and/or two-step Msg 2 2550) for a random access procedure if LBTis failed prior to transmitting the message, e.g., CCA in LBT determinesthat a channel in unlicensed band is busy (occupied by another device).The transmissions of Preamble 2530 and for one or more transport blocks2540 may have a same LBT and/or different LBTs.

For example, radio resources for transmissions of Preamble 2530 and/orone or more transport blocks 2540 may be configured in a same channel(or a same subband or a same BWP or a same UL carrier), where a wirelessdevice performs an LBT for the transmissions (e.g., based on aregulation). In this case, an LBT result on the same channel (or thesame subband or the same BWP or the same UL carrier) may applied fortransmissions of Preamble 2530 and for one or more transport blocks2540. For example, FIG. 26 is an example of radio resource allocationfor a two-step RA procedure. If a frequency offset in FIG. 26 is zero,PRACH 2630 and UL radio resources 2640 may be time-multiplexed. If atimeoffset in FIG. 26 is zero, PRACH 2630 and UL radio resources 2640may be frequency-multiplexed. The frequency offset in FIG. 26 may be anabsolute number in terms of Hz, MHz, and GHz, and/or a relative number,e.g., one of frequency indices predefined/preconfigured. The timeoffsetin FIG. 26 may be an absolute number in terms of micro-second,milli-second, or second and/or a relative number, e.g., in terms ofsubframe, slot, mini-slot, OFDM symbol. PRACH 2630 for transmission ofpreamble 2530 and UL radio resources for transmission of one or more TBs2540 may be subject to one LBT if f1 2610 and f2 2620 are configured inthe same channel (or a same subband or a same BWP or a same UL carrier).For example, in FIG. 26, one LBT before PRACH 2630 may be performed by awireless device (e.g., based on a regulation of unlicensed band). Forexample, a number of LBTs may be determined based on a value oftimeoffset in FIG. 26. For example, one LBT before PRACH 2630 may beperformed by a wireless device if the value of timeoffset is equal toand/or less than a threshold (that may be configured and/or defined by aregulation). For example, the one LBT determines idle, a wireless devicemay perform a transmission of Preamble 2530 via PRACH 2630 followed by asecond transmission of one or more TBs 2540 via the UL radio resources2640 with no LBT (the transmission order may be switched if the UL radioresources 2640 is allocated before PRACH 2630 in time domain). This maybe a case that PRACH and UL radio resources are allocated closely enoughin time domain. For example, if the value of timeoffset is larger thanthe threshold, a wireless device may perform a first LBT before PRACH2630 and perform a second LBT before UI radio resources 2640. Dependingon the value of timeoffset, the wireless device may determine a type ofLBT. For example, if the value of timeoffset is less than 16 us, thewireless device may not perform an LBT before UL radio resources 2640.For example, if the value of timeoffset is between 16 us and 25 us, thewireless device may perform a CAT 2 LBT before UL radio resources 2640.

A wireless may perform an LBT and apply a result (idle/busy) of the LBTto the transmission of preamble 2530 and UL radio resources fortransmission of one or more TBs 2540. For example, a bandwidth of BWPand/or UL carrier, where f1 2610 and f2 2620 are configured, may belarger than a particular value (e.g., 20 MHz). For example, thebandwidth may be less than the particular value (e.g., 20 MHz). Forexample, a wireless device may perform the transmissions of Preamble2530 and for one or more transport blocks 2540, for example, if thechannel is idle. A transmission of Preamble 2530 may be followed by atransmission of one or more transport blocks 2540 or vice versa. Atransmission of Preamble 2530 may be overlapped partially in time (e.g.,based on a frequency separation) with a transmission of one or moretransport blocks 2540. A wireless device may not perform thetransmissions of Preamble 2530 and for one or more transport blocks2540, for example, if the channel is busy. A wireless device may performa particular LBT (e.g., CAT2 LBT) for a first transmission followedafter or in response to a first transmission.

There may be one or more ways for the design of PUSCH resourceconfiguration of two-step RA procedure. For example, PUSCH resources areconfigured separately from the PRACH resource. For example, asconfigured grant Type 1, configured Type 2, and/or SPS in LTE and NR, aperiodicity, an offset, and/or a PUSCH resource size in each PUSCHoccasion is configured by RRC (broadcasting, multicasting, and/orunicasting). In this case, an association may be between one or morePUSCH occasions and one or more PRACH occasions and/or between one ormore PUSCH occasions and one or more downlink reference signals (e.g.,SSBs and/or CSI-RS s). For example, the association (e.g., between oneor more PUSCH occasions and one or more PRACH occasions and/or betweenone or more PUSCH occasions and one or more downlink reference signals)may be one-to-one, multi-to-one, one-to-multi, and/or multi-to-multimapping.

An example design of PUSCH resource configuration of two-step RAprocedure may be that a base station may configure a relative locationof a PUSCH occasion with respect to the PRACH occasion. For example, thePUSCH occasions and the RACH occasion may have the same periodicity,and/or one-to-one mapping between the PUSCH occasions and the RACHoccasion is configured to the wireless device. The information bits forthe configuration can be reduced. The size of PUSCH resource should beconfigured (e.g., based on RRC, MAC CE, and/or DCI) and/orpre-determined.

For a two-step RACH procedure initiated in an unlicensed band, there maybe no time gap and/or a small time gap between a PRACH occasion and itsassociated PUSCH occasion. A wireless device configured with no or smalltime gap between the PRACH occasion and its associated PUSCH occasionmay perform a first LBT before the PRACH occasion and may not perform asecond LBT before the PUSCH occasion associated with the PRACH occasion.A wireless device configured with no or small time gap between the PRACHoccasion and its associated PUSCH occasion may perform a first LBT(e.g., CAT 4) before the PRACH occasion and may perform a second LBTbefore the PUSCH occasion associated with the PRACH occasion. In thiscase the first LBT and the second LBT may be different. For example, thefirst LBT is CAT 4, and the second LBT is a short LBT (e.g., CAT 2).

For a large cell, a round-trip delay may exceed a CP, and a time gap maybe configured to alleviate cross-slot interference (e.g., betweenpreamble detection and PUSCH decoding at a base station). For example, aguard period in PUSCH resource may be configured and/or predefined, e.g.to leave a one or more symbol blacks (e.g., a last symbol blank) toavoid the cross-symbol interference. A value of the guard period maydepend on the cell size, and may be predefined, semi-staticallyconfigured, and/or indicated by L1/L2 signaling (e.g., MAC CE and/orDCI).

For a time domain resource allocation of PUSCH for two-step RAprocedure, a base station may configure a PRACH resource and itsassociated PUSCH resource in the same slot (or subframe). For afrequency domain resource allocation of PUSCH for two-step RA procedure,the PUSCH resources overlapped with PRACH. This overlapping frequencyresource allocation may reduce a number of bits for indication ofconfigured PUSCH and/or PRACH resources. The time domain resource and/orthe frequency resource allocation may not be in the same slot (orsubframe) and/or be overlapped. A base station may flexibility configurethe time domain resource and/or the frequency resource allocation forresource allocation.

A PUSCH occasion for two-step RA procedure may be a time-frequencyresource for a payload transmission associated with a PRACH preamble inMsgA of two-step RA procedure. One or more examples of a resourceallocation of a PUSCH occasion may be (but not limited to) that PUSCHoccasions are separately configured from PRACH occasions. For example,for a PUSCH occasion may be determined based on a periodic resourceindicated by a configured grant (e.g., configured grant Type 1/Type 2and/or SPS). A wireless device may determine the PUSCH occasion furtherbased on an association between the PRACH and PUSCH for msgAtransmission.

One or more examples of a resource allocation of a PUSCH occasion may be(but not limited to) that a base station configure a relative location(e.g., in time and/or frequency) of the PUSCH occasion with respect to aPRACH occasion. For example, time and/or frequency relation betweenPRACH preambles in a PRACH occasion and PUSCH occasions may be a singlespecification fixed value. For example, a time and/or frequency relationbetween each PRACH preamble in a PRACH occasion to the PUSCH occasion isa single specification fixed value. For example, different preambles indifferent PRACH occasions have different values. For example, a timeand/or frequency relation between PRACH preambles in a PRACH occasionand PUSCH occasions are single semi-statically configured value. Forexample, a time and/or frequency relation between each PRACH preamble ina PRACH occasion to the PUSCH occasion is semi-statically configuredvalue. For example, different preambles in different PRACH occasionshave different values. For example, any combination of above example maybe implemented/configured, and the time and frequency relation need notbe the same alternative.

For a two-step RA procedure, a resource allocation for a payloadtransmission in a PUSCH occasion may be predefined and/or configured.For example, a size of a resource in a PUSCH occasion may be predefinedand/or configured. The resource may be continuous or non-continuous(e.g., a base station may flexibly configure the resource). The resourcemay be partitioned into a plurality of resource groups. For example, asize of each of resource groups within a PUSCH occasion may be the sameor different (e.g., depending on the configuration of the two-step RAprocedure). Each resource group index may be mapped to one or morepreamble index.

For example, a base station may configure a wireless device with one ormore parameters indicating a starting point of time and/re frequency fora PUSCH occasion, a number of resource groups, and a size of each of theresource groups. An index of each of the resource groups may be mappedto a preamble index (e.g., a particular preamble) and/or a particularPPRACH occasion. The wireless device may determine a location of each ofresource groups at least based on a preamble index (e.g., in case RO andPUSCH occasion are 1-to-1 mapping) and/or based on an RO index and apreamble index (e.g., in the case of multiple ROs are associated withone PUSCH occasion).

Define the starting point of time/frequency for the PUSCH occasion, anddefine a set of continuous basic unit of PUSCH resources. The size ofresource unit is identical, and the total available number of basicunits is pre-configured. A UE may use one or multiple resource unit forthe msgA transmission, depending on the payload size. The startingresource unit index should be mapped to preamble index, and the lengthof occupied PUSCH resource (as the number of resource unit) can beeither mapped to preamble index or explicitly indicated (e.g. in UCI).[6]

A number of resource groups and/or the detailed mapping amongpreamble(s), resource group(s), and DMRS port(s) may be pre-definedand/or semi-statically configured (and/or indicated by DCI dynamically),e.g., to avoid a blind detection from a base station when multiplepreambles are mapped to the same resource group.

For a payload transmission via a PUSCHC occasion in a two-step RAprocedure, a base station may configurable one or more MCSs and one ormore resource sizes for a transmission of payload. The MCS and resourcesize may be related to a size of the payload. For example, a basestation may configure one or more combinations (and/or associations) ofa size of the payload, MCS, and resource size. For example, one or moreparticular modulation types (e.g., pi/2-BPSK, BPSK, QPSK) may beassociated with a small size of payload. For example, a one or moreparticular modulation types (e.g., QPSK) may be used for a wirelessdevice with a particular RRC state (e.g., RRC_IDLE and/or RRC_INACTIVE).For example, a number of PRBs used for payload transmission may beconfigured over an entire UL BWP and/or over a part of UL BWP (e.g.,this may be predefined and/or semi-statically configured by RRC). Forexample, one or more repetitions of payload may be supported (e.g., anumber of repetitions is predefined, semi-statically configured, and/ortriggered based on one or more conditions (e.g., RSRP of downlinkreference signals, and/or a particular RRC state, and/or a type of awireless device, e.g., stationary, IoT, etc.) for the coverageenhancement of a transmission of payload.

A base station may configure one or more two-step RA configurations fora payload transmission, and the one or more two-step RA configurationmay indicate one or more combinations of payload size, MCS, and/orresource size. The number of the one or more two-step RA configurationsand one or more parameter values (e.g., payload size, MCS, and/orresource size) for each of the one or more two-step RA configurationsmay depend on the content of MsgA and/or an RRC state of a wirelessdevice.

Based on configured two-step RA configuration parameters, a wirelessdevice may transmit MsgA, e.g., comprising at least one preamble via aPRACH occasion and/or a payload via a PUSCH occasion, to a base station.MsgA may comprise an identifier for contention resolution. For example,a wireless device may construct a MAC header as the msgA payload with aplurality of bits (e.g., 56 and/or 72 bits). For example, MsgA maycomprise BSR, PHR, RRC messages, connection request, etc. For example,MsgA may comprise UCI. The UCI in MsgA may comprise at least one offollowing: an MCS indication, HARQ-ACK/NACT and/or CSI report. HARQ forMsgA may combine between an initial transmission of MsgA and one or moreretransmissions of MsgA PUSCH. For example, Msg A may indicate atransmission time of MsgA in the PUSCH of MsgA. A size of msgA maydepend on use case.

There may be a case that different (or independent) PRACH occasions areconfigured between two-step RA and four-step RA. The different (orindependent) PRACH occasions may reduce receiver uncertainty and/orreduce the access delay. The different (or independent) PRACH resourcesmay be configured for two-step RA such that a base station identifieswhether a received preamble is for two-step RA or four-step RA. A basestation may flexibility determine whether to share RACH occasion(s)between two-step RA and four-step RA and configured shared PRACHoccasions and/or different PRACH occasions by RRC messages (or by DCIdynamically). For example, one or more RACH occasions may be sharedbetween two-step RA and four-step RA. For example, PRACH occasion(s) oftwo-step RA may be separate from PRACH occasion(s) of four-step RA.There may be a case station a base station configures one or more PRACHoccasions shared between two-step RA and four-step RA and preamblespartitioned for the two-step RA and the four-step RA.

For example, radio resources for transmissions of Preamble 2530 and oneor more transport blocks 2540 may be configured in different channels(or different subbands or different BWPs or different UL carriers e.g.,one in NUL and the other one in SUL) that may require separate LBTs. Forexample, a wireless device may perform an LBT per channel, per subband,per BWP, and/or per UL carrier. For example, a regulation may require awireless device to perform an LBT per 20 MHz frequency band. FIG. 27 isan example of one or more LBTs performed for a two-step RA procedure. Insome cases, UL radio resources 2750 may be allocated before or alignedwith PRACH 2730 in time (e.g., frequency offset=0) and/or in frequency(e.g., timeoffset=0). A wireless device may perform a first LBT (e.g.,LBT 2740 in FIG. 27) before a first transmission of preamble 2530 (e.g.,via PRACH 2730) and perform a second LBT (e.g., LBT 2760 in FIG. 27)before a second transmission of one or more transport blocks 2540 (e.g.,via UL radio resources 2750). Depending on results of the first LBT andthe second LBT, a wireless device may perform none of, one of, or bothof the first transmission and the second transmission.

For example, the first transmission may be performed when a first resultof the first LBT is idle. The second transmission may be independent ofthe first result. For example, the second transmission may be performedwhen a second result of the second LBT is idle. In this case, there maybe a case that a wireless device may transmit Preamble 2530 in responseto the first LBT being idle and may not be able to transmit one or moretransport blocks 2540 in response to the second LBT being busy. Forexample, a wireless device may not transmit Preamble 2530 in response tothe first LBT being busy and may transmit one or more transport blocks2540 in response to the second LBT being idle. In a two-step RAprocedure, one or more transport blocks may comprise an identifier ofthe wireless device so that a base station may identify which wirelessdevice transmit the one or more transport blocks. The identity may beconfigured by the base station and/or may be at least a portion ofwireless device-specific information, e.g., resume ID, DMRSsequence/index, IMSI, etc. If a wireless device transmits one or moreTBs with no Preamble 2530 (e.g., when a channel, e.g. PRACH 2730 isbusy), a base station may identify the wireless device based on theidentity in the one or more TBs.

In a two-step RA procedure configured in an unlicensed band, theseparate LBTs for transmissions of Preamble and one or more TBs may beperformed in one or more cases. For example, a base station mayconfigure a wireless device with the separate LBTs for a widebandoperation (e.g., for a case that a bandwidth may be larger than 20 MHz).In the wideband operation, a base station may configure a wirelessdevice with a wideband comprising one or more subbands and/or one ormore BWPs. Some of the one or more subbands may be overlapped to eachother at least a portion in frequency domain. Some of the one or moresubbands may not be overlapped to each other at least a portion infrequency domain. Some of the one or more BWPs may be overlapped to eachother at least a portion in frequency domain. Some of the one or moreBWPs may not be overlapped to each other at least a portion in frequencydomain. In a wideband operation, if two radio resources are allocatedwith a space larger than a threshold (e.g., 20 MHz) in frequency domain,separate LBTs may be required for transmissions via the two radioresources. For example, a wideband may comprise one or more subbands,and two radio resources may be allocated in different subbands. In thiscase, a first transmission scheduled in a first subband requires a firstLBT, and a second transmission scheduled in a second subband requires asecond LBT. The first LBT and the second LBT may be independent of eachother.

For example, UL radio resources for transmission of one or more TBs 2540may be subject to a first LBT (e.g., LBT 2760) and be independent of asecond LBT (e.g., LBT 2740) for transmission of Preamble 2530. Forexample, PRACH 2730 for transmission of Preamble 2530 may be subject toa second LBT (e.g., LBT 2760) and be independent of a first LBT (e.g.,LBT 2760) for transmission of one or more TBs 2540. For example, if f12610 and f2 2620 are configured in different channels (or differentsubbands or different BWPs or different UL carriers), a wireless devicemay perform separate LBTs for a first transmissions of Preamble 2530 anda second transmission of one or more transport blocks 2540.

The PRACH and/or UI radio resources in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 may beassociated with at least one downlink reference signal (SSB, CSI-RS,DM-RS). A base station may transmit at least one control message to awireless device to indicate such an association. If the base stationtransmits a plurality of downlink reference signals, a configuration ofeach downlink reference signal has an association with at least onePRACH, that may be configured by RRC and/or PDCCH. For each of downlinkreference signals, there may be one or more of PRACHs and/or one or moreUL radio resources associated with the each of downlink referencesignals.

A wireless device may perform a plurality of uplink transmissionsoverlapped at least in part in time during a transmission occasion i.For example, the plurality of uplink transmissions may occur based on acarrier aggregation, dual connectivity, two UL carriers configured in acell, and/or any combination thereof.

For example, a plurality of uplink transmissions overlapped at least inpart in time during a transmission occasion i may occur, e.g., if aplurality of carriers may be aggregated. A wireless device may transmit,to a base station (and/or received from the base station) one or moresignals in parallel via the plurality of the carriers. the plurality ofcarriers may not be contiguous in a frequency domain. For example, oneor more carriers of the plurality of the carriers may be dispersed,e.g., in a same frequency band and/or in different frequency bands. Forexample, the plurality of carriers may be intraband aggregation withfrequency contiguous component carriers. For example, the plurality ofcarriers may be intraband aggregation with non-contiguous componentcarriers. For example, the plurality of carriers may be interbandaggregation with non-contiguous component carriers.

In carrier aggregation, two or more component carriers may beaggregated. A wireless device may simultaneously receive or transmit onone or multiple component carriers, e.g., depending on its capabilities.For example, frame timing and SFN are aligned across cells that can beaggregated, for example, when a wireless device is configured with thecarrier aggregation. A number of configured component carriers for awireless device may be limited, e.g., 16 or 32 for DL and 16 or 32 forUL.

A wireless device may have one RRC connection with the network for acarrier aggregation. At RRC connectionestablishment/re-establishment/handover, one serving cell may provideNAS mobility information, and at RRC connectionre-establishment/handover, one serving cell provides the security input.This cell may be referred to as the primary cell (PCell). A wirelessdevice may be configured with one or more secondary cells (SCells) toform together with the PCell a set of serving cells (e.g., depending onwireless device capabilities). The configured set of serving cells forthe wireless device may comprise one PCell and one or more SCells.

For a carrier aggregation, a HARQ entity may be required per servingcell. For example, in uplink and/or downlink, there is one hybrid-ARQentity per serving cell and a transport block may be generated perassignment/grant per serving cell. A transport block and its potentialHARQ retransmissions may be mapped to a serving cell.

A reconfiguration, e.g., addition and removal of SCells can be performedby RRC. At handover (e.g., intra-RAT handover), RRC may add, remove,and/or reconfigure SCells for usage with the target PCell. When addingan SCell, dedicated RRC signaling may be used for sending requiredsystem information of the SCell, e.g., while in connected mode, awireless device may not need to acquire broadcast system informationfrom the SCell.

A number of aggregated carriers (or cells) may not be the same in uplinkand downlink. For example, there may be more carriers aggregated in adownlink than in an uplink or vice versa. For a wireless deviceconfigured with a carrier aggregation, scheduling grant(s) andscheduling assignment(s) may be transmitted on the same cell as thecorresponding data (e.g., self-scheduling) and/or on a different cellthan the corresponding data (e.g., cross-carrier scheduling).

For example, a plurality of uplink transmissions overlapped at least inpart in time during a transmission occasion i may occur, e.g., if awireless device is configured with an NUL and SUL on a cell. Forexample, in conjunction with a UL/DL carrier pair (FDD band) or abidirectional carrier (TDD band), a wireless device may be configuredwith an SUL. An SUL may differ from the aggregated uplink. For example,the wireless device may be scheduled by a base station to transmiteither on the supplementary uplink or on the uplink of the carrier beingsupplemented, but not on both at the same time. In a case of SUL, a UEmay be configured with two ULs for one DL of the same cell, and uplinktransmissions on those two ULs may be controlled by a network (e.g.,base station) to avoid overlapping PUSCH/PUCCH transmissions in time.Overlapping transmissions on PUSCH are avoided through scheduling whileoverlapping transmissions on PUCCH may be avoided based on resourceconfiguration(s). For example, PUCCH may be configured for one of thetwo ULs of the cell. An initial access may be supported in each of theuplink.

A wireless device may determine (be scheduled with) a plurality ofuplink transmissions at least during a symbol (or slot). The wirelessdevice may be in a power limited situation, e.g., the wireless devicemay not have enough transmit power to transmit the plurality of theuplink transmissions, e.g., when the wireless device is around a celledge area. The wireless device may determine a transmit power of theplurality of uplink transmissions based on one or more power allocation.For example, the wireless device may determine a transmit power of eachuplink transmission of the plurality of uplink transmissions. Thewireless device may determine the transmit power of each uplinktransmission based on a configured transmit power, P_(CMAX,f,c)(i), foruplink carrier fin a serving cell c (e.g., P_(CMAX,f,c)(i) is in dB andP_(CMAX,f,c)(i) is a linear value of P_(CMAX,f,c)(i)). For example, theconfigured transmit power may be semi-statically configured per a celland/or per a UL carrier. For example, the wireless device may determinea maximum transmit power of an uplink transmission via a cell based onthe configured transmit power configured for the cell and/or for anuplink carrier of the uplink transmission. The wireless device maydetermine a total power of the plurality of uplink transmission based onthe transmit power of each uplink transmission. The wireless device maydetermine the total power based on a total transmit power, P_(CMAX)(i),(e.g., P_(CMAX)(i) is in dB and {circumflex over (P)}_(CMAX)(i) is alinear value of P_(CMAX)(i)). For example, the total transmit power maybe semi-statically configured for the wireless device and/or determinedbased one or more parameters (e.g., the one or more parameters may bedeferent depending on a capability of the wireless device and/or afrequency band). For example, the wireless device may determine amaximum transmit power of an uplink transmission via a cell based on theconfigured transmit power configured for the cell and/or for an uplinkcarrier of the uplink transmission

There may be one or more examples of prioritizations for transmissionpower. For a single cell operation with two uplink carriers (e.g., anNUL carrier and an SUL carrier in a cell) or for an operation withcarrier aggregation of a plurality of cells, a wireless device maydetermine a power allocates power among PUSCH, PUCCH, PRACH, and SRSscheduled on the two uplink carriers of the single cell operation and/orthe operation with the carrier aggregation. For example, a wirelessdevice may allocate power to PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH/SRS transmissions basedon an example priority order (e.g., in descending order) in this exampleembodiment so that the total transmit power of the wireless device maybe smaller than or equal to {circumflex over (P)}_(CMAX)(i) in at leastone symbol of transmission occasion i, e.g., if a total transmit powerof the wireless device for a PUSCH and/or PUCCH and/or PRACH and/or SRStransmission(s) in a respective transmission occasion i exceeds{circumflex over (P)}_(CMAX)(i). For example, {circumflex over(P)}_(CMAX)(i) is a linear value of P_(CMAX)(i) in transmission occasioni, and P_(CMAX)(i) is a total output power in a transmission occasion i.P_(CMAX)(i) may be predefined and/or configured by a network (e.g., by abase station). A wireless device may not include power for transmissionsstarting after and/or in response to the symbol of transmission occasioni (e.g., when determining a total transmit power in a symbol oftransmission occasion i). A total transmit power in a symbol of a slotmay be defined as a sum of linear values of transmit powers for PUSCH,PUCCH, PRACH, and/or SRS in the symbol of the slot.

FIG. 28 is an example of priority orders among different types of ULtransmissions. for example, the priority order (e.g., an descendingorder) is as follows:

-   -   PRACH transmission on the PCell;    -   PUCCH transmission with HARQ-ACK information and/or SR or PUSCH        transmission with HARQ-ACK information, PUCCH transmission with        CSI or PUSCH transmission with CSI;    -   PUSCH transmission without HARQ-ACK information or CSI;    -   SRS transmission, with aperiodic SRS having higher priority than        semi-persistent and/or periodic SRS, or PRACH transmission on a        serving cell other than the PCell

A wireless device may prioritize a power allocation for transmissions onthe primary cell of the MCG or the SCG over transmissions on a secondarycell, e.g., in a case of same priority order and for operation withcarrier aggregation. A wireless device may prioritize power allocationfor transmissions on the PCell over transmissions on the PSCell, e.g.,in a case of same priority order and for operation with carrieraggregation. For a case of same priority order and for operation withtwo UL carriers, a wireless device may prioritize a power allocation fortransmissions on the carrier where the UE is configured to transmitPUCCH. For example, PUCCH may not be configured for any of the two ULcarriers. A wireless device, configured with a cell having no PUCCH inany of two UL carriers, may prioritize power allocation fortransmissions on the non-supplementary UL carrier.

For a two-step RA procedure, a wireless device may transmit Msg Acomprising at least one preamble and/or at least one PUSCH. For example,the at least one PUSCH comprise a wireless device identifier for acontention resolution. For example, the at least one PUSCH comprise RRCmessage(s), e.g., RRC reestablishment request, RRC reconfigurationrequest, RRC resume request, and/or RRC setup request. For example, theat least one PUSCH may comprise control information, e.g., UCI, HARQ-ACKinformation, SR, CSI, and/or combination thereof.

A wireless device may perform a plurality of uplink transmissions. Theplurality of uplink transmissions comprise a first transmission of Msg Ain two-step RA procedure and a second transmission of a UL transmission.FIG. 29A, FIG. 29B, and FIG. 29C are examples of the first transmissionoverlapped at least in part in time with the second transmission. Forexample, the first transmission and the second transmission areoverlapped at least in part in time during a PRACH transmission of theMsg A as shown in FIG. 29A. For example, the first transmission and thesecond transmission are overlapped at least in part in time during aPUSCH transmission of the Msg A as shown in FIG. 29B. For example, thefirst transmission and the second transmission are overlapped at leastin part in time during a PRACH transmission of the MsgA and a PUSCHtransmission of the Msg A as shown in FIG. 29C. The example in FIG. 29Cmay be a combination of examples in FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B. A wirelessdevice may determine a first power of the first transmission and asecond power of the second transmission. For example, for a carrieraggregation, dual connectivity, and/or simultaneous NUL and SULtransmissions, a wireless device determine a first power of the firsttransmission (e.g., scheduled via a first cell or a first UL carrier)based on a first configured power for the first cell (or the firstcarrier). The wireless device determines a second power of the secondtransmission (e.g., scheduled via a second cell or a second UL carrier)based on a second configured power for the second cell (or second firstcarrier). The wireless device may determine a total transmit powercomprising the first transmit power and the second transmit power, e.g.,at least during the overlapped time in FIG. 29A, FIG. 29B, and/or FIG.29C. For example, the wireless device may reduce a transmit power of oneof the first transmit power and/or the second transmit power in responseto

A two-step RA procedure may be initiated based on one or more events.For example, the two-step RA procedure may be initiated for PUSCHtransmission. For example, a wireless device may initiate the two-stepRA procedure when there is data to transmit to a base station. Apreamble transmitted with PUSCH in MsgA of the two-step RA procedure mayenable for a base station to determine a UL timing advanced value and/orto enhance an accuracy of the channel estimation for the PUSCH in MsgA.For example, the two-step RA procedure is initiated for TA adjustment(e.g., for PRACH). For example, a wireless device may receive, from abase station, a PDCCH order initiating the two-step RA procedure. Thewireless device may perform a PRACH transmission and a PUSCHtransmission as a MsgA transmission of the initiated two-step RAprocedure. The PUSCH transmission in this case may reduce a signalingoverhead because the preconfigured PUSCH resources doesn't require thewireless device to transmit an SR for the PUSCH transmission. Forexample, the wireless device transmits a data (e.g., user-plane (UP)data, and/or control-plane data, and/or a payload), UCI, BSR, PHR,and/or combination thereof via the PUSCH transmission of the MsgA.

There may be a case that PRACH transmission in MsgA has a higherpriority than PUSCH transmission in the MsgA (e.g., when a TA adjustmenthas a higher priority that a data transmission). There may be a casethat PUSCH transmission in MsgA has a higher priority than PRACHtransmission in the MsgA (e.g., when a TA adjustment has a lowerpriority that a data transmission, and/or e.g., a TA value is fixed,valid, and/or zero). Based on an existing mechanism (e.g., FIG. 28), awireless device may determine a priority order of a plurality of ULtransmissions based on (but not limited to) a type (or channel type) ofUL transmission (e.g., PRACH, PUSCH, PUCCH, SRS), a cell type (e.g.,PCell vs SCell, and/or a first cell in MCG vs a second cell in SCG), acontent (e.g., HARQ-ACK information, SR, CSI) of the UL transmission,and/or any combination thereof. For example,

Based on an existing mechanism (e.g., FIG. 28), a priority order betweenMsgA and UL transmission may be inaccurate. For example, a wirelessdevice may initiate a two-step RA procedure for transmitting data. Forexample, PUSCH-MsgA has a higher priority (e.g., or more important) thanPRACH-MsgA. In FIG. 29A, based on a priority order of an existingmechanism (e.g., FIG. 28), the wireless device may drop MsgA (e.g., orat least PRACH-MsgA). For example, in FIG. 29A, a first transmissionbased on configured in an SCell and a second transmission of SRStransmission is configured in a PCell. In this case, based on theexisting mechanism (e.g., in FIG. 28), the wireless device may determinethat the second transmission (e.g., UL transmission of the SRStransmission) has a higher priority than PRACH-MsgA. In response to thesecond transmission having a higher priority, the wireless device maydrop PRACH-MsgA. The wireless device may drop PUSCH-MsgA in response todropping the PRACH-MsgA. In this case, there may be a need to determinea priority order based on a first priority order of PUSCH-MsgA and asecond priority order of the second transmission (e.g., SRS). Forexample, in FIG. 29A, the wireless device may drop the secondtransmission during a period of time where PRACH-MsgA and the secondtransmission are overlapped at least in part in time, e.g., ifPUSCH-MsgA has a higher priority than the second transmission (e.g.,SRS).

Based on an existing mechanism (e.g., FIG. 28), a priority order betweenMsgA and UL transmission may be inefficient. For example, a wirelessdevice may initiate a two-step RA procedure for transmitting data. Forexample, PRACH-MsgA has a higher priority (e.g., or more important) thanPUSCH-MsgA. In FIG. 29B, based on a priority order of an existingmechanism (e.g., FIG. 28), the wireless device may drop MsgA (or atleast PUSCH-MsgA). For example, in FIG. 29B, a first transmission basedon configured in an PCell and a second transmission of PUCCH (or PUSCHwith HARQ-ACK information and/or CSI) transmission is configured in anSCell. In this case, based on the existing mechanism (e.g., in FIG. 28),the wireless device may determine that the second transmission (e.g., ULtransmission of the PUCCH (or the PUSCH with HARQ-ACK information and/orCSI) transmission) has a higher priority than PUSCH-MsgA. In response tothe second transmission having a higher priority, the wireless devicemay drop PUSCH-MsgA. The wireless device may drop MsgA in response todetermining the second transmission having a higher priority thanPUSCH-MsgA. In this case, there may be a need to determine a priorityorder based on a first priority order of PRACH-MsgA and a secondpriority order of the second transmission. For example, in FIG. 29B, thewireless device may drop the second transmission during a period of timewhere PUSCH-MsgA and the second transmission are overlapped at least inpart in time, e.g., if PRACH-MsgA has a higher priority than the secondtransmission.

For example, a wireless device may perform a plurality of ULtransmissions comprising a Msg A transmission and one or more first ULtransmissions. The Msg A transmission may comprise PRACH transmissionand PUSCH transmission. The Msg A transmission and the one or more firstUL transmissions may be overlapped in part in time (e.g., at least onesymbol and/or slot). During the time overlapped in part, the wirelessdevice may determine a priority order between the Msg A transmission andthe one or more first UL transmissions, e.g., if the total transmitpower of the plurality of UL transmissions exceeds a threshold (e.g.,predefined and/or semi-statically configured). The wireless device mayallocate power to the Msg A transmission and the one or more first ULtransmissions based on the priority order. Based on an existingmechanism, a wireless device may determine the priority order betweentypes (e.g., channel type such PRACH, PUSCH, PUCCH, SRS) of theplurality of the UL transmissions. For example, based on an existingmechanism, a wireless device may determine the priority order betweenthe PRACH transmission of the Msg A transmission and the one or morefirst UL transmissions, e.g., if the PRACH transmission is overlapped atleast in part in time with the one or more first UL transmissions (e.g.,FIG. 28A). Based on an existing mechanism, a wireless device maydetermine the priority order between the PUSCH transmission of the Msg Atransmission and the one or more first UL transmissions, e.g., if thePUSCH transmission is overlapped at least in part in time with the oneor more first UL transmissions (e.g., FIG. 28B). The existing mechanismmay cause an inefficient use of a two-step RACH procedure. For example,based on the existing mechanism, a wireless device initiates thetwo-step RACH procedure to perform PUSCH transmission. The wirelessdevice may drop a PRACH transmission associated with the PUSCHtransmission in a Msg A and/or scale down a transmit power of the PRACHtransmission, e.g., when the one or more first UL transmissions areoverlapped at least in part in time with the PRACH transmission, and/orat least one of the one or more first UL transmissions has a higherpriority order than the PRACH transmission. For example, the wirelessdevice may drop the PUSCH transmission, e.g., after or in response todropping the PRACH transmission and/or scaling down the transmit powerof the PRACH transmission. There may be a need to determine a priorityorder based on the PRACH transmission of Msg A and the PUSCHtransmission of the Msg A regardless of whether the one or more first ULtransmissions are overlapped at least in part in time with the PRACHtransmission or the PUSCH transmission.

Example embodiments in this specification enhance a determinationprocess of a priority order. In example embodiments, a wireless devicemay determine a first priority of Msg A and determine a priority orderof Msg A transmission and one or more UL transmissions based on thefirst priority and/or one or more second priorities of the one or moreUL transmissions. In this case, the wireless device may determinewhether to drop the Msg A transmission and/or to scale down a transmitpower of the Msg A transmission based on the first priority of Msg A(e.g., by comparing the first priority with at least one priority of atleast one of one or more UL transmissions overlapped with the Msg A).Example embodiments may prevent a wireless device to drop ULtransmission(s) and/or scale down transmit power(s) inefficiently.Preventing unnecessary drop and/or power reduction may result in fewerretransmissions and/or an efficient use of radio resources (e.g.,increasing spectral efficiency and/or increasing system capacity).Example embodiments enhance a prioritization rule for transmission powerreductions and/or transmission drop by including a priority of Msg A inthe prioritization rule.

FIG. 30 is an example of a priority order determination. For example, awireless device performs a first transmission (e.g., on a PCell orSCell) and a second transmission (e.g., a PCell or SCell) that areoverlapped at least in part in time. For example, the first transmissionis a Msg A transmission comprising PRACH (PRACH-MsgA in FIG. 30) andPUSCH (PUSCH-MsgA in FIG. 30). For example, PRACH (PRACH-MsgA in FIG.30) may be overlapped at least in part in time with the secondtransmission. For example, PUSCH (PUSCH-MsgA) may be overlapped at leastin part in time with the second transmission. The wireless device maydetermine a first priority of the Msg A based on a second priority ofthe PRACH and a third priority of the PUSCH. For example, the firstpriority is determined by the second priority (e.g., the first priorityis the same to the second priority), e.g., if the second priority ishigher than the third priority. For example, the first priority isdetermined by the third priority (e.g., the first priority is the sameto the third priority), e.g., if the second priority is lower than thethird priority. The wireless device may determine, based on aprioritization rule in FIG. 28, the first priority for Msg A. Forexample, Msg A is scheduled on PCell, the wireless device may determinethe first priority of Msg A to be the same to PRACH on the PCell in FIG.28 (e.g., because PRACH on the PCell has a higher priority than PUSCH onthe PCell in FIG. 28). For example, Msg A is scheduled on SCell, thewireless device may determine a priority of the PUSCH in Msg A as thefirst priority of Msg A (e.g., because PRACH on the SCell has a lowerpriority than PUSCH on the SCell in FIG. 28).

FIG. 31 is an example of a priority of Msg A. For example, in FIG. 29A,a first transmission may be scheduled on an SCell, and PRACH-MsgA of thefirst transmission is overlapped with the second transmission. Based onthe prioritization rule in FIG. 31, a wireless device may determine apriority of the MsgA to be the same to the priority of the PUSCH-MsgA(e.g., because PUSCH on SCell has a higher priority than PRACH onSCell). For example, in this case, the priority of the MsgA is one ofsecond, third, or fourth highest priority in FIG. 31, e.g., depending onwhether PUSCH-MsgA comprise UCI and/or what information (HARQ-ACK, SR,and/or CSI) the UCI in the PUSCH-MsgA indicate. In this case, in FIG.29A, the wireless device may determine that the PRACH-MsgA has a higherpriority than UL transmission (e.g., SRS) of the second transmissionbased on the prioritization rule in FIG. 31. For example, in FIG. 29B, afirst transmission may be scheduled on a PCell, and PUSCH-MsgA of thefirst transmission is overlapped with the second transmission. Based onthe prioritization rule in FIG. 31, a wireless device may determine apriority of the MsgA to be the same to the priority of the PRACH-MsgA(e.g., because PUSCH on PCell has a lower priority than PRACH on PCell).In this case, in FIG. 29A, the wireless device may determine that theMsg A has a higher priority than UL transmission (e.g., PUCCH) of thesecond transmission based on the prioritization rule in FIG. 31.

In an example, a wireless device may determine a first priority of Msg Abased on a second priority of PUSCH of the Msg A. For example, a basestation and/or a wireless device may initiate a two-step RA procedure toperform PUSCH transmission. For example, in a small cell (e.g., where TAmay be fixed, valid for a long time, and/or zero), it may take longand/or require a plurality of DL/UL signaling for a wireless device withRRC_IDLE or with RRC INACTIVE to receive an UL grant for PUSCHtransmission. The two-step RA procedure may reduce such a latency byallowing the wireless device to transmit the PUSCH with PRACH in MsgA.In this case, the wireless device may determine a first priority of MsgA based on a second priority of PUSCH of the Msg A (e.g., regardless ofa priority of PRACH-MsgA). For example, Msg A is scheduled on SCell, thewireless device may determine the first priority of Msg A to be the sameto PUSCH on the SCell in FIG. 28. For example, Msg A is scheduled onSCell, the wireless device may determine a priority of the PUSCH in MsgA as the first priority of Msg A.

FIG. 32 is an example of a priority of Msg A. For example, in FIG. 29A,a first transmission may be scheduled on an SCell, and PRACH-MsgA of thefirst transmission is overlapped with the second transmission. Based onthe prioritization rule in FIG. 32, a wireless device may determine apriority of the MsgA to be the same to the priority of the PUSCH-MsgA(e.g., regardless of a priority of PRACH-MsgA). For example, in thiscase, the priority of the MsgA is one of second, third, or fourthhighest priority in FIG. 31, e.g., depending on whether PUSCH-MsgAcomprise UCI and/or what information (HARQ-ACK, SR, and/or CSI) the UCIin the PUSCH-MsgA indicate. In this case, in FIG. 29A, the wirelessdevice may determine that the PRACH-MsgA has a higher priority than ULtransmission (e.g., SRS) of the second transmission based on theprioritization rule in FIG. 32. For example, in FIG. 29B, a firsttransmission may be scheduled on a PCell, and PUSCH-MsgA of the firsttransmission is overlapped with the second transmission. Based on theprioritization rule in FIG. 32, a wireless device may determine apriority of the MsgA to be the same to the priority of the PUSCH-MsgA(e.g., regardless of a priority of PRACH-MsgA). In this case, in FIG.29A, the wireless device may determine that the Msg A has a lowerpriority than UL transmission (e.g., PUCCH) of the second transmissionbased on the prioritization rule in FIG. 32, e.g., if the Msg Acomprises PUSCH-MsgA without HARQ or CSI, and the second transmissioncomprising PUCCH.

Example prioritization rules in FIG. 31 and/or FIG. 32 may result in atransmit power reduction and/or dropping at least one UL transmission.FIG. 33A is an example of power reduction. If Msg A comprising PRACH andPUSCH is overlapped at least in part in time with at least one ULtransmission and a total transmit power for a MsgA and the at least oneUL transmission (e.g., for a PUSCH or PUCCH or PRACH or SRStransmission) in transmission occasion i, a wireless device may allocatepower (e.g., determine a power allocation between the MsgA and the atleast one UL transmission) to the Msg A and the at least one ULtransmission based on example prioritization rules in FIG. 31 and/orFIG. 32. For example, the wireless device may determine the transmitpower of each uplink transmission based on a configured transmit power,P_(CMAX,f,c)(i), for uplink carrier fin a serving cell c (e.g.,P_(CMAX,f,c)(i) is in dB and {circumflex over (P)}_(CMAX,f,c)(i) is alinear value of P_(CMAX,f,c)(i)). For example, the configured transmitpower may be semi-statically configured per a cell and/or per a ULcarrier. The wireless device may determine the total transmit power ofthe plurality of uplink transmission based on the transmit power of eachuplink transmission. The wireless device may determine the total powerbased on a total transmit power, P_(CMAX)(i), (e.g., P_(CMAX)(i) is indB and {circumflex over (P)}_(CMAX)(i) is a linear value ofP_(CMAX)(i)). For example, the total transmit power may besemi-statically configured for the wireless device and/or determinedbased on one or more parameters (e.g., the one or more parameters may bedeferent depending on a capability of the wireless device and/or afrequency band). In an example, the wireless device may not includepower for transmissions starting after and/or in response to the symbolof transmission occasion i (e.g., when determining a total transmitpower in a symbol of transmission occasion i). A total transmit power ina symbol of a slot may be defined as a sum of linear values of transmitpowers for PUSCH, PUCCH, PRACH, and/or SRS in the symbol of the slot(e.g., example transmit powers for PUSCH, PUCCH, PRACH, and/or SRS aredescribed elsewhere in the specification). The wireless device mayprioritize a power allocation for transmissions on the primary cell ofthe MCG or the SCG over transmissions on a secondary cell, e.g., in acase of same priority order and for operation with carrier aggregation.The wireless device may prioritize power allocation for transmissions onthe PCell over transmissions on the PSCell, e.g., in a case of samepriority order and for operation with carrier aggregation. For a case ofsame priority order and for operation with two UL carriers, the wirelessdevice may prioritize a power allocation for transmissions on thecarrier where the UE is configured to transmit PUCCH. For example, PUCCHmay not be configured for any of the two UL carriers. The wirelessdevice, configured with a cell having no PUCCH in any of two ULcarriers, may prioritize power allocation for transmissions on thenon-supplementary UL carrier.

FIG. 33B is an example of dropping at least one of UL transmissions. Forexample, an example power reduction in FIG. 32B may result in droppingat least one of UL transmission. In an example, a wireless device mayperform Msg A transmission overlapped at least in part in time with atleast one UL transmission. Based on example prioritization rules in FIG.31 and FIG. 32, the wireless device may determine a priority orderbetween the Msg A transmission and the at least one UL transmission.Based on the priority order, the wireless device may determine to dropat least one of the Msg A transmissions and the at least one ULtransmission. For example, the wireless device determine to drop the atleast one, e.g., if an amount of power reduction is larger than athreshold (e.g., predefined and/or semi-statically configured). Forexample, the wireless device may drop one of PRACH of Msg A or PUSCH ofthe Msg A (e.g., which one overlapped at least in part in time with theat least one UL transmission), e.g., if the wireless device determinethat the Msg A has a lower priority that the at least one ULtransmission.

In FIG. 33B, a wireless device may perform a fallback from a two-step RAprocedure to a four-step RA procedure after or in response todetermining to drop the PUSCH of Msg A. This may be a case that thePUSCH of Msg A is overlapped at least in part in time with the at leastone UI transmission that has a higher priority than the Msg A (e.g.,based on one of example prioritization rule in FIG. 28, FIG. 31, and/orFIG. 32). The wireless device may determine to drop the PUSCH of Msg A,e.g., before PRACH-MsgA transmission. For example, the wireless devicemay determine to drop the PUSCH of Msg A before PRACH-MsgA transmission,e.g., if the at least one UL transmission is a periodic (orsemi-persistent) transmissions such as configured grant Type 1,configured grant Type 2, and/or SPS transmission. For example, Msg A isscheduled on an SCell, and the PUSCH in the Msg A is overlapped at leastin part in time with PUSCH (e.g., with HARQ-ACK, and/or CSI) scheduledbased on the configured grant Type 1. In this case, the wireless devicemay determine to drop the PUSCH in the Msg A before the PRACHtransmission of the Msg A. The wireless device may determine to perform(e.g., fallback to) a four-step RA procedure. The fallback to thefour-step RA procedure after or in response to dropping and/or powerreduction of PRACH in the Msg A may alleviate a congestion level of thetwo-step RA (e.g., PRACH and/or PUSCH of the Msg A).

In an example, a wireless device may receive, from a base station, oneor more messages comprising configuration parameters of a first cell anda second cell. The wireless device may initiate, for the first cell, arandom access procedure to transmit a first message comprising at leastone preamble and one or more transport blocks. The wireless device maydetermine that: a first transmission of the at least one preamble isoverlapped at least in part in time with a second transmission of anuplink signal to the second cell; and a total power, comprising a firstpower of the first transmission and a second power of the secondtransmission, exceeds a threshold. The wireless device may determine apower allocation to the first transmission and the second transmissionbased on a priority order between the one or more transport blocks andthe uplink signal. The wireless device may perform, based on the powerallocation, at least one of the first transmission and the secondtransmission. For example, the random access procedure is a two-steprandom access procedure. For example, the random access procedure is thecontention based random access procedure. For example, the random accessprocedure is the contention free random access procedure. For example,the one or more transport blocks comprise an identifier of the wirelessdevice. For example, the one or more messages indicating a first valueof a first configured transmit power for the first cell and a secondvalue of a second transmit power for the second cell. For example, thefirst power is below the first value and the second power is below thesecond value. For example, the one or more messages indicating a valueof the threshold. For example, the value of the threshold indicates aconfigured maximum total transmit power of the wireless device. Forexample, the one or more transport blocks has a higher priority than theuplink signal. For example, the wireless device may, in response to theone or more transport blocks having a higher priority than the uplinksignal, reduce the second transmission power such that the totaltransmission power is below the threshold during at least one symbol (orslot) of a time that the first transmission of the at least one preambleis overlapped at least in part in time with a second transmission. Forexample, the wireless device may, in response to the one or moretransport blocks having a higher priority than the uplink signal, dropthe second transmission during at least one symbol (or slot) of a timethat the first transmission of the at least one preamble is overlappedat least in part in time with a second transmission. For example, theone or more transport blocks has a lower priority than the uplinksignal. For example, the wireless device may, in response to the one ormore transport blocks having a lower priority than the uplink signal,reduce the first transmission power such that the total transmissionpower is below the threshold during at least one symbol (or slot) of atime that the first transmission of the at least one preamble isoverlapped at least in part in time with a second transmission. Forexample, the wireless device may, in response to the one or moretransport blocks having a higher priority than the uplink signal, dropthe first transmission during at least one symbol (or slot) of a timethat the first transmission of the at least one preamble is overlappedat least in part in time with a second transmission. For example, thefirst cell is one of: a primary cell; a secondary primary cell; asecondary cell of a master cell group; or a secondary cell of asecondary cell group. For example, the second cell is one of: a primarycell; a secondary primary cell; a secondary cell of a master cell group;or a secondary cell of a secondary cell group. For example, the one ormore transport blocks are one of PUSCH, PUCCH, or SRS. For example, theuplink signal is one of PRACH, PUSCH, PUCCH, or SRS.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, from a base station, oneor more messages comprising configuration parameters of a first cell anda second cell. The wireless device may initiate, for the first cell, arandom access procedure to transmit a first transmission of at least onepreamble and one or more transport blocks. The wireless device maydetermine that the first transmission being overlapped at least in partin time with a second transmission of an uplink signal to the secondcell; and a total power, comprising a first power of the firsttransmission and a second power of the second transmission, exceeding athreshold. The wireless device may determine a power allocation to thefirst transmission and the second transmission based on: a firstpriority order of the uplink signal; and a higher priority order betweena second priority order of the at least one preamble and a thirdpriority order of the one or more transport blocks. The wireless devicemay perform, based on the power allocation, at least one of the firsttransmission and the second transmission. For example, the random accessprocedure is a two-step random access procedure. For example, the randomaccess procedure is the contention based random access procedure. Forexample, the random access procedure is the contention free randomaccess procedure. For example, the one or more transport blocks comprisean identifier of the wireless device. For example, the one or moremessages indicating a first value of a first configured transmit powerfor the first cell and a second value of a second transmit power for thesecond cell. For example, the first power is below the first value andthe second power is below the second value. For example, the one or moremessages indicating a value of the threshold. For example, the value ofthe threshold indicates a configured maximum total transmit power of thewireless device. For example, the one or more transport blocks has ahigher priority than the uplink signal. For example, the wireless devicemay, in response to the one or more transport blocks having a higherpriority than the uplink signal, reduce the second transmission powersuch that the total transmission power is below the threshold during atleast one symbol (or slot) of a time that the first transmission of theat least one preamble is overlapped at least in part in time with asecond transmission. For example, the wireless device may, in responseto the one or more transport blocks having a higher priority than theuplink signal, drop the second transmission during at least one symbol(or slot) of a time that the first transmission of the at least onepreamble is overlapped at least in part in time with a secondtransmission. For example, the one or more transport blocks has a lowerpriority than the uplink signal. For example, the wireless device may,in response to the one or more transport blocks having a lower prioritythan the uplink signal, reduce the first transmission power such thatthe total transmission power is below the threshold during at least onesymbol (or slot) of a time that the first transmission of the at leastone preamble is overlapped at least in part in time with a secondtransmission. For example, the wireless device may, in response to theone or more transport blocks having a higher priority than the uplinksignal, drop the first transmission during at least one symbol (or slot)of a time that the first transmission of the at least one preamble isoverlapped at least in part in time with a second transmission. Forexample, the first cell is one of: a primary cell; a secondary primarycell; a secondary cell of a master cell group; or a secondary cell of asecondary cell group. For example, the second cell is one of: a primarycell; a secondary primary cell; a secondary cell of a master cell group;or a secondary cell of a secondary cell group. For example, the one ormore transport blocks are one of PUSCH, PUCCH, or SRS. For example, theuplink signal is one of PRACH, PUSCH, PUCCH, or SRS.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, from a base station, oneor more messages comprising configuration parameters of a first cell anda second cell. The wireless device may initiate, for the first cell, arandom access procedure comprising a first transmission of at least onepreamble and one or more transport blocks. The wireless device maydetermine that: the first transmission is overlapped at least in part intime with a second transmission of a sounding reference signal to thesecond cell; and a total power, comprising a first power of the firsttransmission and a second power of the second transmission, exceeds athreshold. The wireless device may reduce the second power such that thetotal power is below the threshold in response to the determining. Thewireless device may perform, based on the first power and the secondpower, at least one of the first transmission and the secondtransmission. For example, the first cell is a secondary cell and thesecond cell is a primary cell.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, from a base station, oneor more messages comprising configuration parameters of a first cell anda second cell. The wireless device may initiate, for the first cell, arandom access procedure comprising a first transmission of at least onepreamble and one or more transport blocks. The wireless device maydetermine that: the first transmission is overlapped at least in part intime with a second transmission of a sounding reference signal to thesecond cell; and a total power, comprising a first power of the firsttransmission and a second power of the second transmission, exceeds athreshold. The wireless device may drop the second transmission inresponse to the determining. The wireless device may perform, based onthe first power, the first transmission. For example, the first cell isa secondary cell and the second cell is a primary cell.

In an example, a wireless device may receive, from a base station, oneor more messages comprising configuration parameters of a first cell anda second cell. The wireless device may initiate, for the first cell, afirst type random access procedure to transmit a first messagecomprising at least one first preamble and one or more transport blocks.The wireless device may determine that: a first transmission of the oneor more transport blocks is overlapped at least in part in time with asecond transmission of an uplink signal to the second cell; a totalpower, comprising a first power of the first transmission and a secondpower of the second transmission, exceeds a threshold; the one or moretransport blocks have a lower priority than the uplink signal. Thewireless device may select at least one second preamble of a second typerandom access procedure in response to the determining. The wirelessdevice may transmit, via a random access resource of the first cell, theat least one second preamble. For example, the wireless device maydetermine a fallback of a random access procedure from the first typerandom access procedure to the second type random access procedure inresponse to the determining. For example, the one or more messagesindicate at least one of: one or more first preambles comprising the atleast one first preamble of the first type random access procedure; oneor more first random access channel occasions of the first type randomaccess procedure; one or more second preambles comprising the at leastone second preamble of the second type random access procedure; one ormore second random access channel occasions of the second type randomaccess procedure, wherein the one or more second random access channeloccasions comprising the random access resource. For example, thewireless device may, in response to receiving no response correspondingto the at least one second preamble, determine a retransmission of oneor more preambles based on the first type random access procedure. Forexample, the wireless device may, in response to receiving no responsecorresponding to the at least one second preamble, determine aretransmission of one or more preambles based on the second type randomaccess procedure.

There may be a random access response window where a wireless device maymonitor a downlink control channel for a random access responsetransmitted from a base station as a response to a preamble transmittedby the wireless device. For example, a base station may transmit amessage comprising a value of an RAR window. For example, a messagecomprising a random access configuration parameter (e.g.,RACH-ConfigGeneric) may indicates a value of an RAR window (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow in RACH-ConfigGeneric). For example, the value of anRAR window may be fixed, for example, to 10 ms or other time value. Forexample, the value of an RAR window may be defined in terms of a numberof slots as shown in RACH-ConfigGeneric. Based on the number of slotsand a numerology configured for a random access procedure, a wirelessdevice may determine a size of an RAR window. For example, inRACH-ConfigGeneric, s110, s120, s140, and s180 may be values ofra-ResponseWindow for numerologies μ=0, μ=1, μ=2, and μ=3 in FIG. 34,respectively. The parameters in each numerology may be limited to thecase in FIG. 34. For example, the parameters in each numerology may bepredefined with different subcarrier spacing, slot duration, and/orcyclic prefix size.

A wireless device may perform one or more retransmission of one or morepreambles during a random access procedure (e.g., two-step RA procedureand/or four-step RA procedure). There may be one or more conditions atleast based on which the wireless device determines the one or moreretransmission of one or more preambles. For example, the wirelessdevice determines the one or more retransmission of one or morepreambles when the wireless device determines that a random accessresponse reception is not successful. The wireless device may determinethat a random access response reception is not successful, for example,if at least one random access response comprising one or more randomaccess preamble identifiers that matches the transmitted PREAMBLE_INDEXhas not been received until an RAR window (e.g., ra-ResponseWindowconfigured by RRC, e.g., in RACH-ConfigCommon) expires. The wirelessdevice may determine that a random access response reception is notsuccessful, for example, if a PDCCH addressed to the C-RNTI has not beenreceived on the Serving Cell where the preamble was transmitted until aRAR window for a beam failure recovery procedure (e.g.,ra-ResponseWindow configured in BeamFailureRecoveryConfig) expires.

For example, a wireless device determines the one or more retransmissionof one or more preambles when the wireless device determines that acontention resolution is not successful. For example, the wirelessdevice may determine, based on Msg 3 for four-step RA procedure and/orMsgB for two-step RA procedure, whether the contention resolution is notsuccessful. For example, a MAC entity of the wireless device may start acontention resolution timer (e.g., ra-ContentionResolutionTimer) and mayrestart the contention resolution timer (e.g.,ra-ContentionResolutionTimer) at each HARQ retransmission in the firstsymbol after the end of a Msg3 transmission, for example, once awireless device transmits, to a base station, Msg3. For example, fortwo-step RA procedure, the wireless device may fallback to four-step RAprocedure based on an explicit and/or implicit indication of MsgB. Forexample, if MsgB indicates at least one of: UL grant, TC-RNTI, and/orTA, the wireless device may determine to fall back to the four-step RAprocedure. The wireless device may transmit Msg3 after or in response todetermining to fall back to the four-step RA procedure via resource(s)indicated by UL grant in Msg B. In this case the wireless device mayfollow the four-step RA procedure, e.g., starting the contentionresolution timer, and/or determining whether the contention resolutionis successful or not. The wireless device may monitor a PDCCH while thecontention resolution timer (e.g., ra-ContentionResolutionTimer) isrunning, e.g., for example, regardless of the possible occurrence of ameasurement gap. A wireless device may stop the contention resolutiontimer and determine that a contention resolution is successful, forexample, if a notification of a reception of a PDCCH transmission of acell (e.g., SpCell) is received from lower layers, and the wirelessdevice identifies that the PDCCH transmission is an indication of acontention resolution corresponding to a Msg3 transmission (or MsgBtransmission) that the wireless device performed.

A wireless device may determine one or more retransmission of one ormore preambles, for example, if the wireless device determines that acontention resolution is not successful. A wireless device may determinethat a contention resolution is not successful, for example, if thewireless device does not receive an indication of a contentionresolution while a contention resolution timer (e.g.,ra-ContentionResolutionTimer) is running. For example, the wirelessdevice may determine that a contention resolution is not successful, forexample, if the contention resolution timer (e.g.,ra-ContentionResolutionTimer) expires. The wireless device may discard aTEMPRARY_C-RNTI indicated by an RAR (or Msg B) after or in response toan expiry of the contention resolution timer (and/or in response to thecontention resolution being unsuccessful).

For a two-step RA procedure, a wireless device may determine one or moreretransmission of one or more preambles, for example, if the wirelessdevice may not receive MsgB corresponding to MsgA, for example, during awindow configured to monitor MsgB in one or more DL control channels. Awireless device performing a two-step RA procedure may receive aresponse (e.g., MsgB) indicating a fallback to a four-step RA procedure.In this case, the wireless device may start a timer (e.g.,ra-ContentionResolutionTimer) in response to transmitting one or moreTBs (e.g., Msg3) to a base station. The wireless device may determineone or more retransmission of one or more preambles, for example, if thetimer (e.g., ra-ContentionResolutionTimer).

A wireless device may increment a counter counting a number of preambletransmissions (e.g., PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER) by 1 in response toa random access response reception being unsuccessful and/or in responseto a contention resolution being unsuccessful. The wireless device maydetermine that a random access procedure is unsuccessfully completedand/or a MAC entity of the wireless device may indicate a random accessproblem to upper layer(s), for example, if the number of preambletransmissions may reach a threshold, (e.g., ifPREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER=preambleTransMax+1). The wireless devicemay determine that a random access procedure is not completed (and/orone or more retransmission of one or more preambles), for example, ifthe number of preamble transmissions may not reach a threshold, (e.g.,if PREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER<preambleTransMax+1).

A wireless device may delay a particular period of time (e.g., a backofftime) for performing a retransmission of one or more preamble. Forexample, the wireless device may set the backoff time to 0 ms, forexample, when a random access procedure is initiated. The wirelessdevice may set (or update) the backoff time based on thePREAMBLE_BACKOFF determined by a value in a BI field of the MAC subPDU(e.g., BI field in FIG. 19B). For example, the wireless device may setthe PREAMBLE_BACKOFF to value of the BI field of the MAC subPDU using apredefined table. FIG. 35 is an example of backoff parameter values. Forexample, if the wireless device receives BI indicating index 3 (or 0010in a bit string) in the table of FIG. 35, the wireless device may setthe PREAMBLE_BACKOFF to 30 ms. The wireless device may set thePREAMBLE_BACKOFF to value of the BI field of the MAC subPDU multipliedwith SCALING_FACTOR_BI (e.g., a scaling factor) if a base stationconfigures the wireless device with scalingFactorBI by one or more RRCmessages. The wireless device may set (or update) the PREMABLE_BACKOFFbased on a BI field, for example, if a downlink assignment has beenreceived on the PDCCH for the RA-RNTI and the received TB issuccessfully decoded, and/or if the Random Access Response comprises aMAC subPDU with Backoff Indicator (BI in FIG. 19B). The wireless devicemay set the PREAMBLE_BACKOFF to 0 ms, for example, if a downlinkassignment has not been received on the PDCCH for the RA-RNTI and/or thereceived TB is not successfully decoded, and/or if the Random AccessResponse does not comprise a MAC subPDU with Backoff Indicator (BI inFIG. 19B).

A wireless device may determine a backoff time based on thePREAMBLE_BACKOFF. For example, the wireless device may determine thebackoff time, for example, if the wireless device determines that arandom access response is not successful and/or a contention resolutionis not successful. The wireless device may employ a particular selectionmechanism to determine the backoff time. For example, the wirelessdevice may determine the backoff time based on a uniform distributionbetween 0 and the PREAMBLE_BACKOFF. The wireless device may employ anytype of distribution to select the backoff time based on thePREAMBLE_BACKOFF. The wireless device may ignore the PREAMBLE_BACKOFF(e.g., a value in BI field in FIG. 19B) and/or may not have a backofftime. For example, the wireless device may determine whether to applythe backoff time to a retransmission of at least one preamble based onan event type initiating the random access procedure (e.g., Beam FailureRecovery request, handover, etc.) and/or a type of the random accessprocedure (e.g., four-step or two-step RA and/or CBRA or CFRA). Forexample, the wireless device may apply the backoff time to theretransmission, for example, if the random access procedure is CBRA(e.g., where a preamble is selected by a MAC entity of the wirelessdevice) and/or if the wireless device determines that a random accessprocedure is not completed based on a random access response receptionbeing unsuccessful. For example, the wireless device may apply thebackoff time to the retransmission, for example, if the wireless devicedetermines that a random access procedure is not completed based on acontention resolution being unsuccessful.

A wireless device may perform a random access resource selectionprocedure (e.g., select at least one SSB or CSI-RS and/or select PRACHcorresponding to at least one SSB or CSI-RS selected by the wirelessdevice), for example, if the random access procedure is not completed.The wireless device may delay the subsequent random access preambletransmission (e.g., or delay performing a random access resourceselection procedure) by the backoff time.

A radio access technology may allow a wireless device to change (switch)a channel (a BWP, and/or a subband) to transmit at least one preamblefor a retransmission. This may increase a number of preambletransmission opportunities. For example, a base station may transmit, toa wireless device, one or more messages (broadcast messages, and/or RRCmessages) indicating a configuration of the one or more channels (e.g.,BWPs and/or subbands) that one or more PRACH are configured. A wirelessdevice may select one of the one or more channels (e.g., BWPs, and/orsubbands) as a channel (e.g., a BWP and/or a subband) to transmit atleast one first preamble. The wireless device may select the channel(e.g., BWP and/or subband) based on an LBT result. For example, thewireless device performs one or more LBTs on one or more channels, andselect the channel among the channel(s) being sensed as idle. Thewireless device may select the one of channels being sensed as idlebased on, for example, a random selection.

The channel may be defined based on a BWP configuration and/or a subbandconfiguration. For example, a base station may configure a wirelessdevice with one or more initial DL and/or UL BWP. A configuration ofeach of the one or more initial DL and/or UL BWPs may compriseBWP-DownlinkDedicated (e.g., for initial DL BWP) and/orBWP-UplinkDedicated (e.g., for initial UL BWP) configuration that mayindicate at least one of following: subcarrier spacing, cyclic prefix,location and a bandwidth of the each of the one or more initial DLand/or UL BWPs, DL control channel configuration, DL shared channelconfiguration, rach-configuration (e.g., rach-ConfigCommon and/orrach-ConfigDedicated), UL control configuration, and/or UL sharedchannel configuration.

For example, one of (initial) UL BWP(s) may be associated with at leastone of (initial) DL BWP(s). The association may be indicated byconfiguration parameter(s) in the one or more messages transmitted bythe base station and/or predefined. For example, the association may bemade, for example, by an (initial) UL BWP configuration (or an (initial)DL BWP configuration) may comprise a DL BWP index (resp. a UL BWP index)of one of one or more DL BWPs (resp. one of one or more UL BWPs). Theassociation may be made by a predefined rule and/or table. For example,an (initial) UL BWP may have an association with an (initial) DL BWPthat has a same BWP index (e.g., UL BWP #0 with DL BWP #0, UL BWP #1with DL BWP #1, and so on). For example, a wireless device may monitor,for a random access response, a control channel based on theassociation. For example, a wireless device may monitor, for a randomaccess response, a control channel of an (initial) DL BWP associatedwith an (initial) UL BWP where the wireless device transmits at leastone preamble. For example, a wireless device may monitor, for acontention resolution, a control channel of an (initial) DL BWPassociated with an (initial) UL BWP where the wireless device transmitsMsg3.

For example, a wireless device may receive, from a base station, an RRCmessage indicating the association between one of (initial) UL BWP(s)and least one of (initial) DL BWP(s). For example, a serving cellconfiguration (e.g., ServingCellConfigCommon orServingCellConfigCommonSIB) in the RRC message may indicate a BWPconfiguration (e.g., DownlinkConfigCommon or DownlinkConfigCommonSIB forinitial DL BWP and/or UplinkConfigCommonSIB for initial uplink BWP) fora random access procedure. For example, there may be one or more DL/ULBWP pairs, each pair may comprise at least one (initial) DL BWPconfiguration and one or more (initial) UL BWP configuration. Forexample, one (initial) DL BWP configuration and one or more (initial) ULBWP configuration may be paired. The RRC message (and/or the one(initial) DL BWP configuration and/or the serving cell configuration)may comprise parameters indicating one or more transmissions of one ormore SSBs (or CSI-RS s). For example, the one or more SSBs may beconfigured per a BWP (e.g., via the one (initial) DL BWP configuration)and/or per a cell (e.g., via the serving cell configuration). One ormore PRACH resources configured in the one or more (initial) UL BWPconfiguration may be associated with the one or more SSBs. A wirelessdevice may switch (change, and/or select) a UL BWP for a preambleretransmission among the one or more UL BWP associated with the one(initial) DL BWP configuration, for example, if the wireless deviceselects one of the one or more SSBs. A wireless device may select PRACHresource(s) configured in one or more (initial) UL BWPs associated withone or more one or more (initial) DL BWPs. For example, the wirelessdevice may select PRACH resource(s) configured in one or more (initial)UL BWPs associated with one or more one or more (initial) DL BWPs, forexample, if A wireless device may select one or more SSBs from the oneor more (initial) DL BWPs.

In an unlicensed band, a wireless device and/or a base station mayperform an LBT before transmitting each message (e.g., Msg1, Msg2, Msg3,Msg4, MsgA, and/or MsgB). Each message may subject to an LBT failurethat may cause a random access delay/latency. A large delay/latencyduring a random access procedure may result in failing to meet a controlplane requirement. Increasing transmission opportunities configured overa frequency domain (e.g., over one or more channels, BWPs and/orsubbands) may enhance the random access procedure (e.g., improve therandom access delay/latency caused by an LBT failure in an unlicensedband).

For example, a base station may configure a wireless device with aplurality of DL and/or UL BWPs (channels and/or subbands). For a Msg1(e.g., MsgA) transmission, the wireless device may attempt to perform anLBT in one or more UL BWPs configured with RACH resource(s). Once atleast one LBT succeeds on a UL BWP, the wireless device may perform Msg1(e.g., MsgA) transmission via RACH resource(s) in the UL BWP. This mayincrease the probability of LBT success, for example, if each channelstatus of the one or more UL BWPs is independent of each other.

For Msg2/Msg4 (or MsgB) enhancement, a base station may attempt toperform at least one LBT in a plurality of DL BWPs. Once one LBTsucceeds, the base station may perform Msg2/Msg4 (MsgB) transmission. Awireless device may monitor PDCCH in one or more DL BWPs of theplurality of DL BWPs. The one or more DL BWPs may be associated with oneor more UL BWPs where the wireless device transmits at least one Msg1,Msg3 and/or MsgB. The one or more DL BWPs may be predefined and/orsemi-statically configured by an RRC message transmitted by the basestation.

For Msg3 enhancement, a base station may transmit at least one RARcomprising a plurality of UL grants corresponding to a plurality ofBWPs. For example, the at least one RAR may comprises one or more ULgrants, each of the one or more UL grants may comprise one or morefields indicating a BWP identifier and time/frequency domain resource ina BWP corresponding to the BWP identifier. The wireless device mayperform at least one LBT in one or more of indicated BWPs (e.g., theplurality of BWPs). Once one LBT succeeds, the wireless device mayperform Msg3 transmission.

For example, a wireless device may transmit Msg1 and Msg3 via differentchannels (e.g., UL BWPs and/or subbands). For example, a wireless devicemay receive Msg2 and Msg4 via different channels (e.g., DL BWPs and/orsubbands). For example, a wireless device may transmit Msg1 for apreamble retransmission via a channel (e.g., a UL BWP and/or a subband).The channel may be different from a channel where the wireless devicetransmits Msg1 in a previous preamble (re)transmission.

For the retransmission of at least one preamble (or MsgA), a wirelessdevice may select a first channel (e.g., a first subband or a first ULBWP) different from a second channel (e.g., a second subband or a secondUL BWP) where the wireless device performed a last preamble transmission(or a last Msg A transmission). In an existing mechanism, the wirelessdevice may increase a transmit power of the retransmission of at leastone preamble (or MsgA), e.g., regardless of whether the first channeland the second channel are the same or not.

For example, the wireless device may determine the transmit power of theretransmission of at least one preamble (or MsgA) basedPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER. For example, the wireless device may setPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER to 1 as a random access procedureinitialization. The MAC entity of the wireless device may, e.g., foreach Random Access Preamble and/or for each transmission of at least onepreamble transmitted after or in response to determining a random accessreception being unsuccessful and/or a contention resolution beingunsuccessful, increment PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER by 1. Forexample, The MAC entity of the wireless device may incrementPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER by 1, e.g., ifPREAMBLE_TRANSMISSION_COUNTER is greater than one; if the notificationof suspending power ramping counter has not been received from lowerlayers (e.g., the notification is received in response to a preambletransmissions being dropped due to LBT failure and/or in response to aspatial filter is changed); and/or if SSB or CSI-RS selected is notchanged from the selection in the last Random Access Preambletransmission. The wireless device may determine a value ofDELTA_PREAMBLE based on a preamble format and/or numerology selected forthe random access procedure (e.g., one or more values of DELTA_PREAMBLEare predefined associated with one or more preamble format and/ornumerology. For a given preamble forma and a numerology, the wirelessdevice may select a particular value of DELTA_PREAMBLE from the one ormore values). The wireless device may determinePREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER topreambleReceivedTargetPower+DELTA_PREAMBLE+(PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER−1)×PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_STEP.The MAC layer of the wireless device may instruct the physical layer totransmit the Random Access Preamble based on a selected PRACH occasion,corresponding RA-RNTI (e.g., if available), PREAMBLE_INDEX and/orPREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWER.

A wireless device may determine to increase a transmit power of aretransmission carefully. For example, if the transmit power increasesaggressively, it may cause an interference to other wireless devices.For example, if a ramping power of the transmit power for theretransmission is small, it may cause a low reception level (e.g.,received signal power) at a base station and may cause anotherretransmission. For example, an existing power ramping mechanismincrements PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER for a retransmission, e.g., ifthe wireless device selects a downlink reference signal (e.g., SSB orCSI-RS) that is same to the last preamble transmission. The existingpower ramping mechanism may prevent the wireless device to increase atransmit power for a retransmission in one or more cases. In an example,the existing power ramping mechanism may not incrementPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER for a retransmission, e.g., if thewireless device, for the retransmission, selects a first downlinkreference signal (e.g., an SSB or a CSI-RS) that is different from asecond downlink reference signal in the last random access preambletransmission. The existing power ramping mechanism may not incrementPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER for a retransmission, e.g., if a spatialfilter is changed (e.g., if the wireless device selects, for theretransmission, a spatial filter different from the one used in the lastrandom access preamble transmission. In the existing mechanism,suspending power ramping counter may prevent to generate unnecessaryinterference to another wireless device in a spatial domain. There maybe a need to enhance a control of power ramping for a random accessprocedure. For example, the existing mechanism does not control thepower ramping counter with respect to changing a channel (e.g., subbandand/or UL BWP). Different channels may have different congestion levels(e.g., received signal strength indicators), and reusing the existingmechanism for maintaining the power ramping counter may generateunnecessary interference, e.g., for the case that the wireless deviceselect a different channel (subband and/or UL BWP). For example, in anunlicensed spectrum band, a transmission opportunity may be subject toan LBT procedure. To increase the number of transmission opportunity, abase station may configure a plurality of channels (subbands or UL BWPs)for a random access procedure. For example, a wireless device mayperform one or more preamble (re)transmissions via a first channel (afirst subband, or a first UL BWP) for a RA procedure and may determine,for a retransmission, to transmit at least one preamble via a secondchannel (a second subband or a second UL BWP) for the RA procedure. Forexample, the wireless device may perform a first LBT on the firstchannel and a second LBT on the second channel. In response to the firstLBT indicating the first channel occupied and the second LBT indicatingthe second channel being idle, the wireless device may determineswitching a channel from the first channel to the second channel. Eachchannel may have different congestion levels. For example, the wirelessdevice may increment PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER one or more timesfor the one or more preamble (re)transmissions to adjust the preambletransmit power with respect to an interference level of the firstchannel. If the wireless device increments, for a retransmission of theat least one preamble, PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER that has beenadjusted for the first channel, the preamble transmit power of the atleast one preamble on the second channel may be inaccurate. Exampleembodiments enhance an interference control mechanism of a preambletransmit power between different channels (subbands or UL BWPs).

FIG. 36A is an example of PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER maintainedacross different channels. For example, a wireless device may maintain asingle PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER for a plurality of channelscomprising a first channel and a second channel. Each of plurality ofchannels may be configured with at least one RACH resource. Each of theplurality of channels may require an independent LBT, e.g., if theplurality of channels operate in unlicensed band(s). For example, anindependent LBT may be required every certain amount of bandwidth (e.g.,20 MHz), and every certain amount may be determined by a regulationand/or a frequency band. The wireless device may initiate a randomaccess procedure (e.g., two-step or four-step RA and/or contention basedor contention free RA) on a first channel (e.g., first subband and/orfirst UL BWP). The wireless device may setPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER to a first value (e.g., one). Thewireless device may transmit at least one first preamble via the firstchannel. The wireless device may perform a retransmission on the secondchannel, e.g., if a random access response reception is not successfuland/or a contention resolution is not successful. The wireless devicemay, e.g., for each Random Access Preamble and/or for each(re)transmission of the at least one first preamble transmitted,increment PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER by 1 after or in response todetermining a random access reception being unsuccessful and/or acontention resolution being unsuccessful. If a downlink reference signalis change and/or a notification of suspending power ramping, thewireless device may not increment PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER. If thewireless device determines a retransmission of at least one secondpreamble via the second channel (via the channel switching from thefirst channel to the second channel), the wireless device may notincrement PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER in response to switching to thesecond channel. For example, in response to switching to the secondchannel, the wireless device may determine not to incrementPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER regardless of whether the same downlinkreference signal is selected and/or whether there is a notification ofsuspending a power ramping. In an unlicensed band, for example, inresponse to changing a subband and/or UL BWP that require independentLBT, the wireless device may determine not to incrementPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER regardless of whether the same downlinkreference signal is selected and/or whether there is a notification ofsuspending a power ramping. For example, in FIG. 36A, the first channel(e.g., first subband or first UL BWP) and the second channel (e.g.,second subband or second UL BWP) require independent LBT (or differentLBT procedures). For example, after or in response to performing thetransmission of at least one first preamble on the first channel in FIG.36A, the wireless device may determine a retransmission of a preamblefor the same RA procedure. The wireless device may perform a first LBTprocedure on the first channel and a second LBT procedure on the secondchannel. In response to the first LBT indicating the first channel beingidle and the second LBT indicating the second channel being occupied,the wireless device may determine to perform a (re)transmission of atleast one second preamble on the second channel (via channel switchingto the second channel). The wireless device may determine not toincrement PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER in response to switching to thesecond channel, regardless of whether the same downlink reference signalis selected and/or whether there is a notification of suspending a powerramping.

FIG. 36B is an example of PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER maintainedacross different channels. The wireless device may maintain one or morePREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTERs configured for one or more channels(e.g. for one or more subbands or one or more UL BWPs). For example, thewireless device may configure a first number ofPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTERs for the first number of channels(subbands or UL BWPs). For example, the wireless device configured aPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER per channel (subband or UL BWP). Forexample, the wireless device may configure aPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER per a subband that requires anindependent LBT. The wireless device may initiate a RA procedure and seteach of PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER to a first value (e.g., zero).The wireless device may perform one or more preamble transmissions in afirst channel (subband or UL BWP). In response to a RAR reception beingunsuccessful and/or a contention resolution being unsuccessful, thewireless device may determine a preamble retransmission of at least onepreamble. Depending on which channel the wireless device selects for thepreamble retransmission, the wireless device may maintain differentPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTERs. For example, a first channel for a lastpreamble transmission is different from a second channel for a preambleretransmission, the wireless device may maintain a secondPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER associated with the second channel. Forexample, the wireless device may increment the secondPREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER associated with the second channel inresponse to switching to the second channel, e.g., if a downlinkreference signal has not been changed and/or a notification ofsuspending power ramping has not been triggered (or received from aphysical layer of the wireless device). For example, if the wirelessdevice performs the preamble retransmission on a first channel on whichthe wireless device performed a last preamble transmission, the wirelessdevice may maintain a first PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER associatedwith the first channel. For example, the wireless device may incrementthe first PREAMBLE_POWER_RAMPING_COUNTER associated with the firstchannel in response to selecting the same first channel, e.g., if adownlink reference signal has not been changed and/or a notification ofsuspending power ramping has not been triggered (or received from aphysical layer of the wireless device).

In an example, a wireless device may receive, from a base station, oneor more downlink reference signals comprising a first downlink referencesignal. The wireless device may transmit, using a first transmit powerdetermined based on a ramping counter value, at least one first preamblevia a first channel of a first subband, wherein the first channel isassociated with the first downlink reference signal. The wireless devicemay select a second channel of a second subband for a preambleretransmission, wherein the second channel is associated with the firstdownlink reference signal, in response to: receiving no random accessresponse corresponding the at least one first preamble; and performing alisten-before-talk procedure indicating a clear channel on the secondsubband. For example, the wireless device may determine a transmit powerof at least one second preamble using a second transmit power determinedbased on a second ramping counter value, wherein the second rampingcounter value is the same to the first ramping counter value. Thewireless device may transmit, based on the transmit power via the secondchannel, the at least one second preamble. For example, the firstchannel is a first subband and the second channel is a second subband.For example, the first channel and the second channel are associatedwith a first downlink bandwidth part. For example, the wireless devicemay receive one or more downlink reference signals comprising the firstdownlink reference signal via the first downlink bandwidth part. Forexample, the first downlink reference signal is an SSB or CIS-RS.

For a PRACH transmission, a wireless device may determine a transmissionpower for a physical random access channel (PRACH), P_(PRACH,b,f,c)(i),on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c based on DL RS forserving cell c in transmission occasion i as

P _(PRACH,b,f,c)(i)=min{P _(CMAX,f,c)(i),P _(PRACH,target,f,c) +PL_(b,f,c)} [dBm],

where P_(CMAX,f,c)(i) may be a configured wireless device transmissionpower predefined and/or semi-statically configured for carrier f ofserving cell c within transmission occasion i, P_(PRACH,target,f,c) maybe a PRACH target reception power, PREAMBLE_RECEIVED_TARGET_POWERprovided by higher layers (e.g., MAC layer) of the wireless device forthe active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c, and PL_(b,f,c) maybe a pathloss for the active UL BWP b of carrier f based on the DL RSassociated with the PRACH transmission on the active DL BWP of servingcell c and calculated by the UE in dB as referenceSignalPower higherlayer filtered RSRP in dBm, where RSRP may be predefined and the higherlayer filter configuration may be predefined. The wireless device maydetermine PL_(b,f,c) based on the SS/PBCH block associated with thePRACH transmission, e.g., if the active DL BWP is the initial DL BWP andfor SS/PBCH block and a particular CORESET multiplexing pattern (e.g.,pattern 2 or 3).

For example, referenceSignalPower is provided by ss-PBCH-BlockPower(e.g., semi-statically configured by broadcast, multicast, and/orunicast RRC message(s)), e.g., if a PRACH transmission from the wirelessdevice is not in response to a detection of a PDCCH order by the UE, oris in response to a detection of a PDCCH order by the UE that triggers acontention based random access procedure, or is associated with a linkrecovery procedure where a corresponding index q_(new) is associatedwith a SS/PBCH block,

If a PRACH transmission from a UE is in response to a detection of aPDCCH order by the wireless device that triggers a non-contention basedrandom access procedure and depending on the DL RS that the DM-RS of thePDCCH order is quasi-collocated with, referenceSignalPower may beprovided by ss-PBCH-BlockPower or, if the wireless device is configuredresources for a periodic CSI-RS reception or the PRACH transmission isassociated with a link recovery procedure where a corresponding indexq_(new) is associated with a periodic CSI-RS configuration,referenceSignalPower may be obtained by ss-PBCH-BlockPower andpowerControlOffsetSS. For example, powerControlOffsetSS, that maysemi-statically configured by broadcast, multicast, and/or unicast RRC,may provide an offset of CSI-RS transmission power relative to SS/PBCHblock transmission power. If powerControlOffsetSS is not provided to thewireless device, the wireless device may determine an offset of 0 dB. Ifthe active TCI state for the PDCCH that provides the PDCCH orderincludes two RS, the wireless device may determine that one RS hasQCL-TypeD properties and the wireless device may use the one RS whenapplying a value provided by powerControlOffsetSS.

If within a random access response window, the wireless device may notreceive a random access response that may contain a preamble identifiercorresponding to the preamble sequence transmitted by the wirelessdevice, the wireless device may determine a transmission power for asubsequent PRACH transmission.

If prior to a PRACH retransmission, a wireless device may determine tochange (or select a different) a spatial domain transmission filter,Layer 1 of the wireless device may notify higher layers of the wirelessdevice to suspend the power ramping counter.

If, due to power allocation to PUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH/SRS transmissions, dueto an LBT indicating a channel occupied, and/or due to power allocationin EN-DC operation, the wireless device may not transmit a PRACH in atransmission occasion, Layer 1 may notify higher layers to suspend thecorresponding power ramping counter. If due to power allocation toPUSCH/PUCCH/PRACH/SRS transmissions, or due to power allocation inEN-DC, the UE may transmit a PRACH with reduced power in a transmissionoccasion, Layer 1 may notify higher layers to suspend the correspondingpower ramping counter.

For a PUSCH transmission on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cellc, a wireless device may calculate a linear value {circumflex over(P)}_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(i, j, q_(d), l) of the transmit power P_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(i, j, q_(d), l), with parameters described elsewhere in thisspecification. If the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format0_1 and when txConfig in PUSCH-Config is set to ‘codebook’, the wirelessdevice may scale the linear value by the ratio of the number of antennaports with a non-zero PUSCH transmission power to the maximum number ofSRS ports supported by the wireless device in one SRS resource. Forexample, the wireless device split the power equally across the antennaports on which the wireless device transmits the PUSCH with non-zeropower. For example, two PUSCH transmissions are scheduled in differentSRS resource sets (e.g., different antenna groups and/or panels), thewireless device may determine a PUSCH power per each SRS resource set(e.g., antenna group and/or panel) and scale a sum of one or moredetermined PUSCH powers for the different SRS resource sets (e.g., thedifferent antenna groups and/or panels), for example, if the sum exceed(e.g., larger than and/or equal to) P_(CMAX,f,c)(i).

For example, i a wireless device transmits a PUSCH on active UL BWP b ofcarrier f of serving cell c using parameter set configuration with indexj and PUSCH power control adjustment state with index l, the wirelessdevice may determine the PUSCH transmission power P_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(i, j,q_(d), l) in PUSCH transmission occasion i as

${P_{{PUSCH},b,f,c}\left( {i,j,q_{d},l} \right)} = {\min {{\begin{Bmatrix}{{P_{{CMAX},f,c}(i)},} \\\begin{matrix}{{P_{{O\; \_ \; {PUSCH}},b,f,c}(j)} + {10\; {\log_{10}\left( {2^{\mu} \cdot {M_{{RB},b,f,c}^{PUSCH}(i)}} \right)}} +} \\{{{\alpha_{b,f,c}(j)} \cdot {{PL}_{b,f,c}\left( q_{d} \right)}} + {\Delta_{{TF},b,f,c}(i)} + {f_{b,f,c}\left( {i,l} \right)}}\end{matrix}\end{Bmatrix}\lbrack{dBm}\rbrack}.}}$

In an example, P_(CMAX,f,c)(i) may be the configured wireless devicetransmit power for carrier f of serving cell c in PUSCH transmissionoccasion i. P_(0_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) may be a parameter composed of the sumof a component P_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(j) and a componentP_(0_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) where jϵ{0, 1, . . . , J−1}.

For example, if a wireless device is not provided P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet orfor a PUSCH transmission scheduled by a RAR UL grant, a wireless devicemay determine j=0, P_(0_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(0)=0, andP_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(0)=P_(0_PRE)+Δ_(PREAMBLE_Msg3), where a higherlayer parameter, e.g., preambleReceivedTargetPower (for P_(0_PRE)) andmsg3-DeltaPreamble (for Δ_(PREAMBLE_Msg3)), may be provided by higherlayers, or Δ_(PREAMBLE_Msg3)=0 dB if msg3-DeltaPreamble is not provided,for carrier f of serving cell c.

In an example, for a PUSCH (re)transmission configured byConfiguredGrantConfig, j=1, P_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(1) is provided byp0-NominalWithoutGrant, orP_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(1)=P_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(0) ifp0-NominalWithoutGrant is not provided, and P_(0_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(1) isprovided by p0 obtained from p0-PUSCH-Alpha in ConfiguredGrantConfigthat provides an index P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId to a set of P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetfor active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c

In an example, for jϵ{2, . . . , J−1}=S_(j), aP_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(j) value, applicable for all jϵS_(j), may beprovided by p0-NominalWithGrant, orP_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(j)=P_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(0) ifp0-NominalWithGrant is not provided, for each carrier f of serving cellc and a set of P_(0_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) values are provided by a set ofp0 in P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet indicated by a respective set ofp0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId for active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c

In an example, if the wireless device is provided bySRI-PUSCH-PowerControl more than one values of p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId andif DCI format 0_1 includes a SRI field, the wireless device may obtain amapping from sri-PUSCH-PowerControlld in SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl betweena set of values for the SRI field in DCI format 0_1 and a set of indexesprovided by p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId that map to a set of P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetvalues. If the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_1 thatincludes an SRI field, the wireless device may determine the value ofP_(0_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) from the p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId value that ismapped to the SRI field value.

If the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_0 or by a DCIformat 0_1 that does not include a SRI field, or ifSRI-PUSCHPowerControl is not provided to the UE, j=2, and the wirelessdevice determines P_(0_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) from the value of the firstp0-Pusch-AlphaSet in p0-AlphaSets.

For α_(b,f,c)(j) with j=0, α_(b,f,c)(0) may be a value of msg3-Alpha,when provided; otherwise, a wireless device may determineα_(b,f,c)(0)=1. For α_(b,f,c)(j) with j=1, α_(b,f,c)(1) may be providedby alpha obtained from p0-PUSCH-Alpha in ConfiguredGrantConfig providingan index P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId to a set of P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet for active ULBWP b of carrier f of serving cell c. For α_(b,f,c)(j) with jϵS_(J), aset of α_(b,f,c)(j) values may be provided by a set of alpha inP0-PUSCH-AlphaSet indicated by a respective set of p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetIdfor active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c.

For example, if the wireless device is provided SRI-PUSCH-PowerControland more than one values of p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId, and if DCI format 0_1includes a SRI field, the wireless device may obtain a mapping fromsri-PUSCH-PowerControlld in SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl between a set ofvalues for the SRI field in DCI format 0_1 and a set of indexes providedby p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId that map to a set of P0-PUSCH-AlphaSet values. Ifthe PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_1 that includes anSRI field, the wireless device may determine the values of α_(b,f,c)(j)from the p0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId value that is mapped to the SRI field value

For example, if the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_0or by a DCI format 0_1 that does not include a SRI field, or ifSRI-PUSCH-PowerControl is not provided to the UE, j=2, and the wirelessdevice may determine α_(b,f,c)(j) from the value of the firstp0-PUSCH-AlphaSet in p0-AlphaSets

For example, M_(RB,b,f,c) ^(PUSCH)(i) may be the bandwidth of the PUSCHresource assignment expressed in number of resource blocks for PUSCHtransmission occasion i on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cellc and μ is a SCS configuration.

For example, PL_(b,f,c) (q_(d)) may be a downlink pathloss estimate indB calculated by the wireless device using reference signal (RS) indexq_(d) for the active DL BWP of serving cell c.

For example, i the wireless device is not providedPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS or before the wireless device is provideddedicated higher layer parameters, the wireless device may calculatePL_(b,f,c)(q_(d)) using a RS resource from the SS/PBCH block that thewireless device may use to obtain MIB

For example, if the wireless device is configured with a number of RSresource indexes, up to the value of maxNrofPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRSs,and a respective set of RS configurations for the number of RS resourceindexes by PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS, the set of RS resource indexes maycomprise one or both of a set of SS/PBCH block indexes, each provided byssb-Index when a value of a corresponding pusch-PathlossReferenceRS-Idmaps to a SS/PBCH block index, and a set of CSI-RS resource indexes,each provided by csi-RS-Index when a value of a correspondingpusch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id maps to a CSI-RS resource index. Thewireless device may identify an RS resource index q_(d) in the set of RSresource indexes to correspond either to a SS/PBCH block index or to aCSI-RS resource index as provided by pusch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id inPUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS

For example, if the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a RAR UL grant,the wireless device may use the same RS resource index q_(d) as for acorresponding PRACH transmission

For example, if the wireless device is provided SRI-PUSCH-PowerControland more than one values of PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id, the wirelessdevice may obtain a mapping from sri-PUSCH-PowerControlld inSRI-PUSCH-PowerControl between a set of values for the SRI field in DCIformat 0_1 and a set of PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id values. If thePUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_1 that includes a SRIfield, the wireless device may determine the RS resource index q_(d)from the value of PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id that is mapped to the SRIfield value where the RS resource is either on serving cell c or, ifprovided, on a serving cell indicated by a value ofpathlossReferenceLinking

For example, If the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_0,and if the wireless device is provided a spatial setting byPUCCH-Spatialrelationinfo for a PUCCH resource with a lowest index foractive UL BWP b of each carrier f and serving cell, the wireless deviceuses the same RS resource index q_(d) as for a PUCCH transmission in thePUCCH resource with the lowest index

For example, if the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_0and if the wireless device is not provided a spatial setting for a PUCCHtransmission, or by a DCI format 0_1 that does not include a SRI field,or if SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl is not provided to the wireless device, thewireless device determines a RS resource index q_(d) with a respectivePUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id value being equal to zero where the RSresource is either on serving cell c or, if provided, on a serving cellindicated by a value of pathlossReferenceLinking

For a PUSCH transmission configured by ConfiguredGrantConfig, ifrrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant is included in ConfiguredGrantConfig, a RSresource index q_(d) may be provided by a value ofpathlossReferenceIndex included in rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant where theRS resource may be either on serving cell c or, if provided, on aserving cell indicated by a value of pathlossReferenceLinking

For a PUSCH transmission configured by ConfiguredGrantConfig that doesnot include rrc-ConfiguredUplinkGrant, the wireless device may determinean RS resource index q_(d) from a value of PUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Idthat is mapped to an SRI field value in a DCI format activating thePUSCH transmission. For example, if the DCI format activating the PUSCHtransmission does not include an SRI field, the wireless device maydetermine an RS resource index q_(d) with a respectivePUSCH-PathlossReferenceRS-Id value being equal to zero where the RSresource is either on serving cell c or, if provided, on a serving cellindicated by a value of pathlossReferenceLinking

The wireless device may determine PL_(f,c)(q_(d))=referenceSignalPowerhigher layer filtered RSRP, where referenceSignalPower may be providedby higher layers and a calculation of RSRP may be predefined for thereference serving cell and the higher layer filter configurationprovided by QuantityConfig is for the reference serving cell

For example, if the wireless device is not configured periodic CSI-RSreception, referenceSignalPower is provided by ss-PBCH-BlockPower. Forexample, if the wireless device is configured periodic CSI-RS reception,referenceSignalPower is provided either by ss-PBCH-BlockPower or bypowerControlOffsetSS providing an offset of the CSI-RS transmissionpower relative to the SS/PBCH block transmission power. For example, ifpowerControlOffsetSS is not provided to the wireless device, thewireless device may determine an offset of 0 dB.

The wireless device may determine

_(TF,b,f,c)(i)=10 log₁₀ ((2^(BPRE·K) ^(s) −1)·β_(offset) ^(PUSCH)) forK_(S)=1.25 and

_(TF,b,f,c)(i)=0 for K_(S)=0 where K_(S) may be provided by deltaMCS foreach UL BWP b of each carrier f and serving cell c. If the PUSCHtransmission is over more than one layer,

_(TF,b,f,c)(i)=0. BPRE and β_(offset) ^(PUSCH), for active UL BWP b ofeach carrier f and each serving cell c, may be computed as below

-   -   the wireless device may determine BPRE=Σ_(r=0)        ^(C-1)K_(r)/N_(RE) for PUSCH with UL-SCH data and        BPRE=Q_(m)·R/β_(offset) ^(PUSCH) for CSI transmission in a PUSCH        without UL-SCH data, where

C may be a number of transmitted code blocks, K_(r) is a size for codeblock r, and N_(RE) may be a number of resource elements determined asN_(RE)=M_(RB,b,f,c) ^(PUSCH)(i). Σ_(j=0) ^(N) ^(symb,b,f,c) ^(PUSCH)^((i)-1)N_(sc,data) ^(RB)(i, j), where N_(symb,b,f,c) ^(PUSCH)(i) may bea number of symbols for PUSCH transmission occasion i on active UL BWP bof carrier f of serving cell c, N_(sc,data) ^(RB)(i, j) may be a numberof subcarriers excluding DM-RS subcarriers and phase-tracking RS samplesin PUSCH symbol j, 0≤j<N_(symb,b,f,c) ^(PUSCH)(i), and C, K_(r) may bepredefined and/or indicated by a DCI and/or RRC.

-   -   The wireless device may determine β_(offset) ^(PUSCH)=1 for        example, when the PUSCH includes UL-SCH data and β_(offset)        ^(PUSCH)=β_(offset) ^(CSI,1), for example, when the PUSCH        includes CSI and does not include UL-SCH data.    -   Q_(m) may be the modulation order and R is the target code rate,        provided by the DCI format scheduling the PUSCH transmission        that includes CSI and does not include UL-SCH data.

For the PUSCH power control adjustment state f_(b,f,c)(i, l) for activeUL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c in PUSCH transmission occasion iδ_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(i, l) may be a transmit power control (TPC) commandvalue included in a DCI format 0_0 or DCI format 0_1 that schedules thePUSCH transmission occasion i on active UL BWP b of carrier f of servingcell c or jointly coded with other TPC commands in a DCI format 2_2 withCRC scrambled by a particular RNTI (e.g., TPC-PUSCH-RNTI). The wirelessdevice may determine lϵ{0, 1} if the wireless device is configured withtwoPUSCH-PC-AdjustmentStates and l=0 if the wireless device is notconfigured with twoPUSCH-PC-AdjustmentStates or if the PUSCHtransmission is scheduled by a RAR UL grant.

For a PUSCH (re)transmission configured by ConfiguredGrantConfig, thevalue of lϵ{0, 1} may be provided to the wireless device bypowerControlLoopToUse. For example, if the wireless device is providedSRI-PUSCH-PowerControl, the wireless device may obtain a mapping betweena set of values for the SRI field in DCI format 0_1 and the 1 value(s)provided by sri-PUSCH-ClosedLoopindex. For example, if the PUSCHtransmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_1 and if DCI format 0_1includes a SRI field, the wireless device may determine the 1 value thatis mapped to the SRI field value For example, if the PUSCH transmissionis scheduled by a DCI format 0_0 or by a DCI format 0_1 that does notinclude a SRI field, or if a SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl is not provided tothe UE, l=0 For example, if the wireless device obtains one TPC commandfrom a DCI format 2_2 with CRC scrambled by a TPC-PUSCH-RNTI, the lvalue may be provided by the closed loop indicator field in DCI format2_2.

The wireless device may determine that f_(b,f,c)(i, l)=f_(b,f,c)(i−i₀,l)+Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(m, l) is the PUSCH powercontrol adjustment state l for active UL BWP b of carrier f of servingcell c and PUSCH transmission occasion i if the wireless device is notprovided tpc-Accumulation, where the δ_(PUSCH,b,f,c) values are given ina predefined table.

For example, Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(m, l) may be a sumof TPC command values in a set D_(i) of TPC command values withcardinality C(D_(i)) that the wireless device receives betweenK_(PUSCH)(i−i₀) 1 symbols before PUSCH transmission occasion i−i₀ andK_(PUSCH)(i) symbols before PUSCH transmission occasion i on active ULBWP b of carrier f of serving cell c for PUSCH power control adjustmentstate l, where i₀>0 may be the smallest integer for whichK_(PUSCH)(i−i₀) symbols before PUSCH transmission occasion i−i₀ isearlier than K_(PUSCH)(i) symbols before PUSCH transmission occasion i.

For example, if a PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCI format 0_0 orDCI format 0_1, K_(PUSCH)(i) may be a number of symbols for active ULBWP b of carrier f of serving cell c after a last symbol of acorresponding PDCCH reception and before a first symbol of the PUSCHtransmission.

For example, if a PUSCH transmission is configured byConfiguredGrantConfig, K_(PUSCH)(i) may be a number of K_(PUSCH,min)symbols equal to the product of a number of symbols per slot, N_(symb)^(slot), and the minimum of the values provided by k2 inPUSCH-ConfigCommon for active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c.

For example, if the wireless device has reached maximum power for activeUL BWPb of carrier f of serving cell c at PUSCH transmission occasioni−i₀ and Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(m, l)≤0, then thewireless device may determine f_(b,f,c)(i, l)=f_(b,f,c)(i−i₀, l).

For example, if the wireless device has reached minimum power for activeUL BWPb of carrier f of serving cell c at PUSCH transmission occasioni−i₀ and Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(PUSCH,b,f,c)(m, l)≤0, then thewireless device may determine f_(b,f,c)(i, l)=f_(b,f,c)(i−i₀, l).

For example, a wireless device may reset accumulation of a PUSCH powercontrol adjustment state l for active UL BWP b of carrier f of servingcell c to f_(b,f,c)(0, l)=0, for example, if a configuration for acorresponding P_(0_UE_PUSCH,b,f,c)(j) value is provided by higherlayers. For example, a wireless device may reset accumulation of a PUSCHpower control adjustment state l for active UL BWP b of carrier f ofserving cell c to f_(b,f,c)(0, l)=0, for example, if a configuration fora corresponding α_(b,f,c)(j) value is provided by higher layers

For example, if j>1 and the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCIformat 0_1 that includes a SRI field, and the wireless device isprovided higher SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl, the wireless device maydetermine the value of l from the value of j based on an indication bythe SRI field for a sri-PUSCH-PowerControlld value associated with thesri-P0-PUSCH-AlphaSetId value corresponding to j and with thesri-PUSCH-ClosedLoopindex value corresponding to l.

For example, if j>1 and the PUSCH transmission is scheduled by a DCIformat 0_0 or by a DCI format 0_1 that does not include an SRI field orthe wireless device is not provided SRI-PUSCH-PowerControl, the wirelessdevice may determine l=0.

For example, if j=1, l is provided by the value ofpowerControlLoopToUse, the wireless device may determine thatf_(b,f,c)(i, l)=δ_(PUSCH,b,f,c) (i, l) is the PUSCH power controladjustment state for active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c andPUSCH transmission occasion i if the wireless device is providedtpc-Accumulation, where δ_(PUSCH,b,f,c) absolute values may bepredefined.

For example, if the wireless device receives a random access responsemessage in response to a PRACH transmission on active UL BWP b ofcarrier f of serving cell c, the wireless device may determinef_(b,f,c)(0, l)=

P_(rampup,b,f,c)+δ_(msg2,b,f,c), where the wireless device may determinethat l=0 and δ_(msg2,b,f,c) is a TPC command value indicated in therandom access response grant of the random access response messagecorresponding to the PRACH transmission on active UL BWP b of carrier fin the serving cell c, and

${\Delta \; P_{{rampup},b,f,c}} = {\min \left\lbrack {\left\{ {\max \left( {0,{P_{{CMAX},f,c} - \begin{pmatrix}{10\; {\log_{10}\left( {2^{\mu} \cdot {M_{{RB},b,f,c}^{PUSCH}(0)}} \right)}} \\{{+ {P_{{O\; \_ \; {PUSCH}},b,f,c}(0)}} + {{\alpha_{b,f,c}(0)} \cdot {PL}_{c}}} \\{{+ {\Delta_{{TF},b,f,c}(0)}} + \delta_{{{msg}\; 2},b,f,c}}\end{pmatrix}}} \right)} \right\},{\Delta \; P_{{rampuprequested},b,f,c}}} \right\rbrack}$

and

P_(rampuprequested,b,f,c) is provided by higher layers and correspondsto the total power ramp-up requested by higher layers from the first tothe last random access preamble for carrier f in the serving cell c,M_(RB,b,f,c) ^(PUSCH)(0) is the bandwidth of the PUSCH resourceassignment expressed in number of resource blocks for the first PUSCHtransmission on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c, and

_(TF,b,f,c)(0) is the power adjustment of first PUSCH transmission onactive UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c.

For example, if a wireless device transmits a PUCCH on active UL BWP bof carrier f in the primary cell c using PUCCH power control adjustmentstate with index l, the wireless device determines the PUCCHtransmission power P_(PUCCH,b,f,c)(i, q_(u), q_(d), l) in PUCCHtransmission occasion i as

${P_{{PUCCH},b,f,c}\left( {i,q_{u},q_{d},l} \right)} = {\min {{\begin{Bmatrix}{{P_{{CMAX},f,c}(i)},} \\\begin{matrix}{{P_{{O\; \_ \; {PUSCH}},b,f,c}\left( q_{u} \right)} + {10\; {\log_{10}\left( {2^{\mu} \cdot {M_{{RB},b,f,c}^{PUCCH}(i)}} \right)}} +} \\{{\Delta_{F\; \_ \; {PUCCH}}(F)} + {\Delta_{{TF},b,f,c}(i)} + {g_{b,f,c}\left( {i,l} \right)}}\end{matrix}\end{Bmatrix}\lbrack{dBm}\rbrack}.}}$

For example, P_(CMAX,f,c)(i) may be the configured wireless devicetransmit power defined in for carrier f of serving cell c in PUCCHtransmission occasion i. For example, P_(0_PUCCH,b,f,c)(q_(u)) may be aparameter composed of the sum of a component P_(0_NOMINAL_PUCCH),provided by p0-nominal, or P_(0_NOMINAL_PUCCH)=0 dBm, for example, ifp0-nominal is not provided, for carrier f of primary cell c and, ifprovided, a component P_(0_UE_PUCCH) (q_(u)) provided by p0-PUCCH-Valuein P0-PUCCH for active UL BWP b of carrier f of primary cell c, where0≤q_(u)<Q_(u). Q_(u) may be a size for a set of P_(0_UE_PUCCH) valuesprovided by maxNrofPUCCH-P0-PerSet. The set of P_(0_UE_PUCCH) values maybe provided by p0-Set. If p0-Set is not provided to the wireless device,the wireless device may determine P_(0_UE_PUCCH)(q_(u))=0, 0≤q_(u)<Q_(u)

For example, if the wireless device is providedPUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, the wireless device may obtain a mapping, byan index provided by p0-PUCCH-Id, between a set ofpucch-SpatialRelationInfold values and a set of p0-PUCCH-Value values.If the wireless device is provided more than one values forpucch-SpatialRelationInfold and the wireless device receives anactivation command indicating a value of pucch-SpatialRelationInfold,the wireless device may determine the p0-PUCCH-Value value through thelink to a corresponding p0-PUCCH-Id index. The wireless device may applythe activation command with a time offset (e.g., 3 ms) after a slotwhere the wireless device transmits HARQ-ACK information for the PDSCHproviding the activation command. For example, if the wireless device isnot provided PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, the wireless device may obtainthe p0-PUCCH-Value value from the P0-PUCCH with p0-PUCCH-Id value equalto 0 in p0-Set.

For example, M_(RB,b,f,c) ^(PUCCH)(i) may be a bandwidth of the PUCCHresource assignment expressed in number of resource blocks for PUCCHtransmission occasion i on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cellc and μ is a SCS configuration.

For example, PL_(b,f,c) (q_(d)) may be a downlink pathloss estimate indB calculated by the wireless device using RS resource index q_(d) asdescribed elsewhere in this specification for the active DL BWP ofcarrier f of the primary cell c.

For example, if the wireless device is not provided pathlossReferenceRSsor before the wireless device is provided dedicated higher layerparameters, the wireless device may determine PL_(b,f,c) (q_(d)) using aRS resource obtained from the SS/PBCH block that the wireless deviceuses to obtain MIB.

For example, if the wireless device is provided a number of RS resourceindexes, the wireless device may determine PL_(b,f,c) (q_(d)) using RSresource with index q_(d), where 0≤q_(d)<Q_(d). Q_(d) may be a size fora set of RS resources provided by maxNrofPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRSs. Theset of RS resources may be provided by pathlossReferenceRSs. The set ofRS resources may comprise one or both of a set of SS/PBCH block indexes,each provided by ssb-Index in PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS when a value ofa corresponding pucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id maps to a SS/PBCH blockindex, and a set of CSI-RS resource indexes, each provided bycsi-RS-Index when a value of a correspondingpucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id maps to a CSI-RS resource index. Thewireless device may identify an RS resource in the set of RS resourcesto correspond either to a SS/PBCH block index or to a CSI-RS resourceindex as provided by pucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id inPUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS.

For example, if the wireless device is providedPUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, the wireless device may obtain a mapping, byindexes provided by corresponding values ofpucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id, between a set ofpucch-SpatialRelationInfold values and a set of reference signal valuesprovided by PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS. If the wireless device isprovided more than one values for pucch-SpatialRelationInfold and thewireless device receives an activation command indicating a value ofpucch-SpatialRelationInfold, the wireless device may determine thereference signal value in PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS through the link toa corresponding pucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id index. The wireless devicemay apply the activation command with a time offset (e.g., 3 ms) after aslot where the wireless device transmits HARQ-ACK information for thePDSCH providing the activation command.

For example, if PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo comprises servingCellIdindicating a serving cell, the wireless device may receive the RS forresource index q_(d) on the active DL BWP of the serving cell. Forexample, if the wireless device is not providedPUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, the wireless device may obtain the referencesignal value in PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRS from thepucch-PathlossReferenceRS-Id with index 0 in PUCCH-PathlossReferenceRSwhere the RS resource is either on a same serving cell or, if provided,on a serving cell indicated by a value of pathlossReferenceLinking.

For example, the parameter Δ_(F_PUCCH) (F) may be provided bydeltaF-PUCCH-f0 for PUCCH format 0, deltaF-PUCCH-f1 for PUCCH format 1,deltaF-PUCCH-f2 for PUCCH format 2, deltaF-PUCCH-f3 for PUCCH format 3,and deltaF-PUCCH-f4 for PUCCH format 4.

For example,

_(TF,b,f,c)(i) may be a PUCCH transmission power adjustment component onactive UL BWP b of carrier f of primary cell c. For a PUCCH transmissionusing PUCCH format 0 or PUCCH format 1, the wireless device maydetermine

${\Delta_{{TF},b,f,c}(i)} = {{10\; {\log_{10}\left( \frac{N_{ref}^{PUCCH}}{N_{symb}^{PUCCH}(i)} \right)}} + {{\Delta_{UCI}(i)}.}}$

For example, N_(symb) ^(PUCCH)(i) may be a number of PUCCH format 0symbols or PUCCH format 1 symbols included in a PUCCH resource of aPUCCH resource set indicated by a value of a PUCCH resource indicatorfield in DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1, or provided by nrofSymbols inPUCCH-format0 or in PUCCH-format1 respectively. For example, thewireless device may determine N_(ref) ^(PUCCH)=2 for PUCCH format 0. Forexample, the wireless device may determine N_(ref) ^(PUCCH)=N_(symb)^(slot) for PUCCH format 1. For example, the wireless device maydetermine

_(UCI)(i)=0 for PUCCH format 0. For example, the wireless device maydetermine

_(UCI)(i)=10 log₁₀(O_(UCI)(i)) for PUCCH format 1, where O_(UCI)(i) maybe a number of UCI bits in PUCCH transmission occasion i.

For a PUCCH transmission using PUCCH format 2 or PUCCH format 3 or PUCCHformat 4 and for a number of UCI bits smaller than or equal to 11, thewireless device may determine

_(TF,b,f,c)(i)=10log₁₀(K₁·(n_(HARQ-ACK)(i)+O_(SR)(i)+O_(CSI)(i))/N_(RE)(i)). For example,K₁=6. For example, n_(HARQ-ACK)(i) may be a number of HARQ-ACKinformation bits that the wireless device determines for Type-1 HARQ-ACKcodebook and for Type-2 HARQ-ACK codebook. If the wireless device is notprovided with pdsch-HARQ-ACK-Codebook, the wireless device may determinen_(HARQ-ACK)(i)=1 if the wireless device includes a HARQ-ACK informationbit in the PUCCH transmission; otherwise, the wireless device maydetermine n_(HARQ-ACK)(i)=0.

For example, O_(SR)(i) may be a number of SR information bits that thewireless device determines. For example, O_(CSI)(i) may be a number ofCSI information bits that the wireless device determines.

For example, N_(RE)(i) may be a number of resource elements determinedas N_(RE)(i)=M_(RB,b,f,c) ^(PUCCH)(i)·N_(sc,ctrl)^(RB)(i)·N_(symb-UCI,b,f,c) ^(PUCCH)(i), where N_(sc,ctrl) ^(RB)(i) maybe a number of subcarriers per resource block excluding subcarriers usedfor DM-RS transmission, and N_(symb-UCI,b,f,c) ^(PUCCH)(i) number ofsymbols excluding symbols used for DM-RS transmission for PUCCHtransmission occasion i on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cellc

For a PUCCH transmission using PUCCH format 2 or PUCCH format 3 or PUCCHformat 4 and for a number of UCI bits larger than 11, the wirelessdevice may determine

_(TF,b,f,c)(i)=10 log₁₀(2^(K) ² ^(·BPRE(i))−1).

For example, K₂=2.4. For example, the wireless device may determineBPRE(i)=(O_(ACK)(i)+O_(SR)(i)+O_(CSI)(i)+O_(CRC)(i))/N_(RE)(i).

For example, O_(ACK)(i) may be a number of HARQ-ACK information bitsthat the wireless device determines for Type-1 HARQ-ACK codebook and forType-2 HARQ-ACK codebook. If the wireless device is not providedpdsch-HARQ-ACK-Codebook, the wireless device may determine O_(ACK)=1 ifthe wireless device includes a HARQ-ACK information bit in the PUCCHtransmission; otherwise, O_(ACK)=0.

For example, O_(SR)(i) may be a number of SR information bits that thewireless device determines. For example, O_(CSI)(i) may be a number ofCSI information bits that the wireless device determines. For example,O_(CRC)(i) may be a number of CRC bits.

For example, N_(RE)(i) may be a number of resource elements that thewireless device may determine as N_(RE)(i)=M_(RBb,f,c)^(PUSSCH)(i)·N_(sc,ctrl) ^(RB)(i)·N_(symb-UCI,b,f,c) ^(PUCCH)(i), whereN_(sc,ctrl) ^(RB)(i) may be a number of subcarriers per resource blockexcluding subcarriers used for DM-RS transmission, andN_(symb-UCI,b,f,c) ^(PUCCH)(i) may be a number of symbols excludingsymbols used for DM-RS transmission for PUCCH transmission occasion i onactive UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c.

For the PUCCH power control adjustment state g_(b,f,c)(i, l) for activeUL BWP b of carrier f of primary cell c and PUCCH transmission occasioni, the wireless device may determine at least one of following.

For example, δ_(PUCCH,b,f,c)(i, l) may be a TPC command value and isincluded in a DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1 for active UL BWP b ofcarrier f of the primary cell c that the wireless device may detect forPUCCH transmission occasion i or is jointly coded with other TPCcommands in a DCI format 2_2 with CRC scrambled by a particular RNTI(e.g., TPC-PUCCH-RNTI).

For example, l ϵ{0, 1} if the wireless device is providedtwoPUCCH-PC-AdjustmentStates and PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo and l=0 ifthe wireless device is not provided twoPUCCH-PC-AdjustmentStates orPUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo.

For example, if the wireless device obtains a TPC command value from aDCI format 1_0 or a DCI format 1_1 and if the wireless device isprovided PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, the wireless device may obtain amapping, by an index provided by p0-PUCCH-Id, between a set ofpucch-SpatialRelationInfold values and a set of values forclosedLoopindex that provide the l value(s). If the wireless devicereceives an activation command indicating a value ofpucch-SpatialRelationInfold, the wireless device may determine the valueclosedLoopindex that provides the value of l through the link to acorresponding p0-PUCCH-Id index.

For example, if the wireless device obtains one TPC command from a DCIformat 2_2 with CRC scrambled by a particular RNTI (e.g.,TPC-PUCCH-RNTI), the l value is provided by the closed loop indicatorfield in DCI format 2_2, the wireless device may determine thatg_(b,f,c)(i, l)=g_(b,f,c)(i−i₀, l)+Σ_(m=0) ^(C(C) ^(i)⁾⁻¹δ_(PUCCH,b,f,c)(m, l) is the current PUCCH power control adjustmentstate l for active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c and PUCCHtransmission occasion i, where the δ_(PUCCH,b,f,c) values may bepredefined.

For example, Σ_(m=0) ^(C(C) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(PUCCH,b,f,c)(m, l) may be a sumof TPC command values in a set C_(i) of TPC command values withcardinality C(C_(i)) that the wireless device receives between K_(PUCCH)(i−i₀)−1 symbols before PUCCH transmission occasion i−i₀ andK_(PUCCH)(i) symbols before PUCCH transmission occasion i on active ULBWP b of carrier f of serving cell c for PUCCH power control adjustmentstate, where i₀>0 may be the smallest integer for which K_(PUCCH) (i−i₀)symbols before PUCCH transmission occasion i−i₀ is earlier thanK_(PUCCH)(i) symbols before PUCCH transmission occasion i.

For example, if the PUCCH transmission is in response to a detection bythe wireless device of a DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1, K_(PUCCH)(i)may be a number of symbols for active UL BWP b of carrier f of servingcell c after a last symbol of a corresponding PDCCH reception and beforea first symbol of the PUCCH transmission.

For example, if the PUCCH transmission is not in response to a detectionby the wireless device of a DCI format 1_0 or DCI format 1_1,K_(PUCCH)(i) may be a number of K_(PUCCH,min) symbols equal to theproduct of a number of symbols per slot, N_(symb) ^(slot), and theminimum of the values provided by k2 in PUSCH-ConfigCommon for active ULBWP b of carrier f of serving cell c.

For example, if the wireless device has reached maximum power for activeUL BWP b of carrier f of primary cell c at PUCCH transmission occasioni−i₀ and Σ_(m=0) ^(C(C) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹Δ_(PUCCH,b,f,c)(m, l)≥0, then thewireless device may determine g_(b,f,c)(i, l)=g_(b,f,c)(i−i₀, l).

For example, if wireless device has reached minimum power for active ULBWP b of carrier f of primary cell c at PUCCH transmission occasion i−i₀and Σ_(m=0) ^(C(C) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹Δ_(PUCCH,b,f,c)(m, l)≤0, then the wirelessdevice may determine g_(b,f,c)(i, l)=g_(b,f,c)(i−i₀, l)

For example, if a configuration of a P_(0_PUCCH,b,f,c)(q_(u)) value fora corresponding PUCCH power control adjustment state l for active UL BWPb of carrier f of serving cell c is provided by higher layers, thewireless device may determine g_(b,f,c)(0, l)=0. For example, if thewireless device is provided PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo, the wirelessdevice may determine the value of 1 from the value of q_(u) based on apucch-SpatialRelationInfold value associated with the p0-PUCCH-Id valuecorresponding to q_(u) and with the closedLoopindex value correspondingto l; otherwise, l=0

For example, if a configuration of a P_(0_PUCCH,b,f,c)(q_(u)) value fora corresponding PUCCH power control adjustment state l for active UL BWPb of carrier f of serving cell c is not provided by higher layers, thewireless device may determine that g_(b,f,c) (0, l)=

P_(rampup,b,f,c)+δ_(b,f,c) For example, l=0, and δ_(b,f,c) may be theTPC command value indicated in a random access response grantcorresponding to a PRACH transmission or is the TPC command value in aDCI format with CRC scrambled by a particular RNTI (e.g., C-RNTI orMCS-C-RNTI) that the wireless device detects in a first PDCCH receptionin a search space set provided by recoverySearchSpaceId if the PUCCHtransmission is a first PUCCH transmission after a number of symbols(e.g., 28 symbols) from a last symbol of the first PDCCH reception, and,if the wireless device transmits PUCCH on active UL BWP b of carrier fof serving cell c, the wireless device may determine

${{\Delta \; P_{{rampup},b,f,c}} = {\min \begin{bmatrix}{\max \begin{pmatrix}{0,} \\\begin{matrix}{P_{{CMAX},f,c} - \left( {P_{{O\; \_ \; {PUCCH}},b,f,c} + {{PL}_{b,f,c}\left( q_{d} \right)} +} \right.} \\\left. {{\Delta_{F\; \_ \; {PUCCH}}(F)} + \Delta_{{TF},b,f,c} + \delta_{b,f,c}} \right)\end{matrix}\end{pmatrix}} \\{\Delta \; P_{{rampuprequested},b,f,c}}\end{bmatrix}}};$

otherwise, The wireless device may

${{\Delta \; P_{{rampup},b,f,c}} = {\min \begin{bmatrix}{{\max \begin{pmatrix}{0,} \\{P_{{CMAX},f,c} - \left( {P_{{O\; \_ \; {PUCCH}},b,f,c} + {{PL}_{b,f,c}\left( q_{d} \right)}} \right)}\end{pmatrix}},} \\{\Delta \; P_{{rampuprequested},b,f,c}}\end{bmatrix}}};$

where ΔP_(rampuprequested,b,f,c) may be provided by higher layers andcorresponds to the total power ramp-up requested by higher layers fromthe first to the last preamble for active UL BWP b of carrier f ofprimary cell c, and

_(F_PUCCH)(F) corresponds to PUCCH format 0 or PUCCH format 1.

If a wireless device transmits SRS on active UL BWP b of carrier f ofserving cell c using SRS power control adjustment state with index l,the wireless device may determine the SRS transmission powerP_(SRS,b,f,c)(i, q_(s), l) in SRS transmission occasion i as

${P_{{SRS},b,f,c}\left( {i,q_{s},l} \right)} = {\min {{\begin{Bmatrix}{{P_{{CMAX},f,c}(i)},} \\\begin{matrix}{{P_{{O\; \_ \; {SRS}},b,f,c}\left( q_{s} \right)} + {10\; {\log_{10}\left( {2^{\mu} \cdot {M_{{SRS},b,f,c}(i)}} \right)}} +} \\{{{\alpha_{{SRS},b,f,c}\left( q_{s} \right)} \cdot {{PL}_{b,f,c}\left( q_{d} \right)}} + {h_{b,f,c}\left( {i,l} \right)}}\end{matrix}\end{Bmatrix}\lbrack{dBm}\rbrack}.}}$

For example, P_(CMAX,f,c) (i) may be the configured wireless devicetransmit power for carrier f of serving cell c in SRS transmissionoccasion i. For example, P_(0_SRS,b,f,c)(q_(s)) may b provided by p0 foractive UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c and SRS resource setq_(s) provided by SRS-ResourceSet and SRS-ResourceSetId; if p0 is notprovided, P_(0_SRS,b,f,c)(q_(s))(q_(s))=P_(0_NOMINAL_PUSCH,f,c)(0). Forexample, M_(SRS,b,f,c)(i) may be an SRS bandwidth expressed in number ofresource blocks for SRS transmission occasion i on active UL BWP b ofcarrier f of serving cell c and μ is a SCS configuration. For example,α_(SRS,b,f,c)(q_(s)) may be provided by alpha for active UL BWP b ofcarrier f of serving cell c and SRS resource set q_(s).

For example, PL_(b,f,c)(q_(d)) may be a downlink pathloss estimate in dBcalculated by the wireless device using RS resource index q_(d) asdescribed elsewhere in this specification for the active DL BWP ofserving cell c and SRS resource set q_(s). The RS resource index q_(d)may be provided by pathlossReferenceRS associated with the SRS resourceset q_(s) and may be either a ssb-Index providing a SS/PBCH block indexor a csi-RS-Index providing a CSI-RS resource index.

For example, if the wireless device is not provided pathlossReferenceRSor before the wireless device is provided dedicated higher layerparameters, the wireless device may determine PL_(b,f,c)(q_(d)) using aRS resource obtained from the SS/PBCH block that the wireless deviceuses to obtain MIB. For example, if the wireless device is providedpathlossReferenceLinking, the RS resource may be on a serving cellindicated by a value of pathlossReferenceLinking.

For example, the wireless device may determine h_(b,f,c)(i,l)=h_(b,f,c)(i, l), where f_(b,f,c)(i, l) may be the current PUSCH powercontrol adjustment state, for example ifsrs-PowerControlAdjustmentStates indicates a same power controladjustment state for SRS transmissions and PUSCH transmissions.

For example, the wireless device may determineh_(b,f,c)(i)=h_(b,f,c)(i−1)+Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(SRS,b,f,c)(m), forexample, if the wireless device is not configured for PUSCHtransmissions on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c, or ifsrs-PowerControlAdjustmentStates indicates separate power controladjustment states between SRS transmissions and PUSCH transmissions, andif tpc-Accumulation is not provided, where the δ_(SRS,b,f,c) values maybe predefined.

For example, δ_(SRS,b,f,c)(m) may be jointly coded with other TPCcommands in a PDCCH with DCI format 2_3. For example, Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D)^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(SRS,b,f,c)(m) may be a sum of TPC command values in a setS_(i) of TPC command values with cardinality C(S_(i)) that the wirelessdevice receives between K_(SRS)(i−i₀)−1 symbols before SRS transmissionoccasion i−i₀ and K_(SRS)(i) symbols before SRS transmission occasion ion active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c for SRS power controladjustment state, where i₀>0 may be the smallest integer for whichK_(SRS)(i−i₀) symbols before SRS transmission occasion i−i₀ is earlierthan K_(SRS)(i) symbols before SRS transmission occasion i.

For example, if the SRS transmission is aperiodic, K_(SRS)(i) may be anumber of symbols for active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell cafter a last symbol of a corresponding PDCCH triggering the SRStransmission and before a first symbol of the SRS transmission

For example, if the SRS transmission is semi-persistent or periodic,K_(SRS)(i) may be a number of K_(SRS,min) symbols equal to the productof a number of symbols per slot, N_(symb) ^(slot), and the minimum ofthe values provided by k2 in PUSCH-ConfigCommon for active UL BWP b ofcarrier f of serving cell c.

For example, if the wireless device has reached maximum power for activeUL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c at SRS transmission occasioni−i₀ and Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D) ^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(SRS,b,f,c)(m)>0, then the wirelessdevice may determine h_(b,f,c)(i)=h_(b,f,c)(i−i₀). For example, if thewireless device has reached minimum power for active UL BWP b of carrierf of serving cell c at SRS transmission occasion i−i₀ and Σ_(m=0) ^(C(D)^(i) ⁾⁻¹δ_(SRS,b,f,c)(m)≤0, then the wireless device may determineh_(b,f,c)(i)=h_(b,f,c)(i−i₀).

For example, if a configuration for a P_(0_SRS,b,f,c)(q_(s)) value orfor a α_(SRS,b,f,c)(q_(s)) value for a corresponding SRS power controladjustment state l for active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cell c isprovided by higher layer, the wireless device may determineh_(b,f,c)(0)=0; else the wireless device may determine h_(b,f,c)(0)=

P_(rampup,b,f,c)+δ_(msg2,b,f,c).

For example, δ_(msg2,b,f,c) may be the TPC command value indicated inthe random access response grant corresponding to the random accesspreamble that the wireless device transmitted on active UL BWP b ofcarrier f of the serving cell c, and

${\Delta \; P_{{rampup},b,f,c}} = {{\min \begin{bmatrix}{{\max \begin{pmatrix}{0,} \\\begin{matrix}{P_{{CMAX},f,c} - \left( {{P_{{O\; \_ \; {SRS}},b,f,c}\left( q_{s} \right)} +} \right.} \\\left. {{10\; {\log_{10}\left( {2^{\mu} \cdot {M_{{SRS},b,f,c}(i)}} \right)}} + {{\alpha_{{SRS},b,f,c}\left( q_{s} \right)} \cdot {{PL}_{b,f,c}\left( q_{d} \right)}}} \right)\end{matrix}\end{pmatrix}},} \\{\Delta \; P_{{rampuprequested},b,f,c}}\end{bmatrix}}.}$

For example, ΔP_(rampuprequested,b,f,c) may be provided by higher layersand corresponds to the total power ramp-up requested by higher layersfrom the first to the last preamble for active UL BWP b of carrier f ofserving cell c.

For example, the wireless device may determineh_(b,f,c)(i)=δ_(SRS,b,f,c)(i) if the wireless device is not configuredfor PUSCH transmissions on active UL BWP b of carrier f of serving cellc, or if srs-PowerControlAdjustmentStates indicates separate powercontrol adjustment states between SRS transmissions and PUSCHtransmissions, and tpc-Accumulation is provided, and the wireless devicemay detect a DCI format 2_3 K_(SRS,min) symbols before a first symbol ofSRS transmission occasion i, where absolute values of δ_(SRS,b,f,c) maybe predefined.

For example, if srs-PowerControlAdjustmentStates indicates a same powercontrol adjustment state for SRS transmissions and PUSCH transmissions,the update of the power control adjustment state for SRS transmissionoccasion i may occur at the beginning of each SRS resource in the SRSresource set q_(s); otherwise, the update of the power controladjustment state SRS transmission occasion i may occur at the beginningof the first transmitted SRS resource in the SRS resource set q_(s).

According to various embodiments, a device such as, for example, awireless device, off-network wireless device, a base station, and/or thelike, may comprise one or more processors and memory. The memory maystore instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors,cause the device to perform a series of actions. Embodiments of exampleactions are illustrated in the accompanying figures and specification.Features from various embodiments may be combined to create yet furtherembodiments.

FIG. 37 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure. At 3710, a wireless device may transmit a firstpreamble via a first sub-band. At 3720, the wireless device maydetermine to perform a first preamble retransmission based on receivingno response to the first preamble. At 3730, the wireless device mayselect, for the first preamble retransmission, a second sub-band. At3740, based on the second sub-band being different from the firstsub-band, the wireless device may determine that a transmission power ofthe first preamble retransmission may be based on a same value of apower ramping counter used for transmitting the first preamble. At 3750,the wireless device may transmit, based on the transmission power, asecond preamble for the first preamble retransmission via the secondsub-band.

According to an example embodiment, the first sub-band and the secondsub-band may be configured in an unlicensed cell. According to anexample embodiment, the first sub-band may be configured in a firstbandwidth part of a cell, and the second sub-band may be configured in asecond bandwidth part of the cell. According to an example embodiment,the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be configured in a thirdbandwidth part of a cell. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may increment, based on the receiving no response, apreamble transmission counter. According to an example embodiment, theselecting, for the first preamble retransmission, the second sub-banddifferent from the first sub-band may be based on a listen-before-talkindicating the second sub-band being idle. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may select a first downlink referencesignal for transmitting the first preamble. According to an exampleembodiment, based on determining to perform the first preambleretransmission, the wireless device may select a second downlinkreference signal for transmitting the second preamble. According to anexample embodiment, the determination that the transmission power of thefirst preamble retransmission may be based on the same value of a powerramping counter may be further based on the first downlink referencesignal and the second downlink reference signal being the same.According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may determine toperform a second preamble retransmission based on receiving no responseto the second preamble. According to an example embodiment, the wirelessdevice may select, for a second preamble retransmission, the secondsub-band. According to an example embodiment, based on the selecting thesecond sub-band, the wireless device may increment the power rampingcounter. According to an example embodiment, the wireless device maytransmit, using a second transmission power determined based on thepower ramping counter, a third preamble via the second sub-band.According to an example embodiment, the incrementing the power rampingcounter may be further based on a same downlink reference signal usedfor the first preamble retransmission being used for the second preambleretransmission.

FIG. 38 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure. At 3810, a wireless device may transmit a firstpreamble via a first sub-band. According to an example embodiment, afirst power ramping counter of the first sub-band may be used todetermine a first transmission power of the first preamble. At 3820, thewireless device may determine to perform a first preamble retransmissionbased on receiving no response to the first preamble. At 3830, thewireless device may select, for the first preamble retransmission, asecond sub-band. At 3840, based on the selecting, the wireless devicemay increment a second power ramping counter of the second sub-band. At3850, the wireless device may determine that a second transmission powerof the first preamble retransmission is based on a second power rampingcounter of the second sub-band. At 3860, the wireless device maytransmit, based on the second transmission power, a second preamble forthe first preamble retransmission via the second sub-band.

According to an example embodiment, the first sub-band and the secondsub-band may be configured in an unlicensed cell. According to anexample embodiment, the first sub-band may be configured in a firstbandwidth part of a cell, and the second sub-band may be configured in asecond bandwidth part of the cell. According to an example embodiment,the first sub-band and the second sub-band may be configured in a thirdbandwidth part of a cell. According to an example embodiment, thewireless device may increment, based on the receiving no response, apreamble transmission counter. According to an example embodiment, theselecting, for the first preamble retransmission, the second sub-bandmay be based on a listen-before-talk indicating the second sub-bandbeing idle. According to an example embodiment, the wireless device mayreceive configuration parameters of the first sub-band and the secondsub-band. According to an example embodiment, the wireless device maydetermine a first value of a first power ramping counter and a secondvalue of a second power ramping counter value to a first initial value.According to an example embodiment, the first initial value may be one.According to an example embodiment, the first initial value may be zero.According to an example embodiment, the wireless device may determine toperform a second preamble retransmission based on receiving no responseto the second preamble. According to an example embodiment, based on thedetermining to perform the second preamble retransmission, the wirelessdevice may increment the second power ramping counter of the secondsub-band. According to an example embodiment, the wireless device mayselect a first downlink reference signal for transmitting the firstpreamble. According to an example embodiment, based on determining toperform the first preamble retransmission, the wireless device mayselect a second downlink reference signal for transmitting the secondpreamble. According to an example embodiment, the incrementing a secondpower ramping counter of the second sub-band may be further based on thefirst downlink reference signal and the second downlink reference signalbeing the same. According to an example embodiment, the wireless devicemay determine to perform a second preamble retransmission based onreceiving no response to the second preamble. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may select, for a second preambleretransmission, the second sub-band. According to an example embodiment,based on the selecting the second sub-band, the wireless device mayincrement the second power ramping counter. According to an exampleembodiment, the wireless device may transmit, using a secondtransmission power determined based on the power ramping counter, athird preamble via the second sub-band. According to an exampleembodiment, the incrementing the second power ramping counter may befurther based on a same downlink reference signal used for the firstpreamble retransmission being used for the second preambleretransmission.

FIG. 39 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure. At 3910, a wireless device may initiate a randomaccess procedure comprising a first transmission via a secondary cell.According to an example embodiment, the first transmission may comprisea preamble and one or more transport blocks. At 3920, the wirelessdevice may determine that a transmission of the preamble may overlapwith a second transmission of a sounding reference signal via a primarycell during a time interval. The wireless device may determine that atotal transmit power, comprising a first transmit power of the preambleand a second transmit power of the sounding reference signal, may belarger than a first value during the time interval. At 3930, based onthe determination that the transmission may overlap with the secondtransmission and the total transmit power may be larger than the firstvalue, the wireless device may adjust the second transmit power suchthat the total transmit power during the time interval may be smallerthan or equal to the first value. At 3940, the wireless device mayperform, using the total transmit power, at least one of the preambleand the sounding reference signal.

According to an example embodiment, the random access procedure may beinitiated for a beam failure recovery. According to an exampleembodiment, the random access procedure may be initiated for acontention-based two-step random access procedure. According to anexample embodiment, a first resource used for transmitting the preamblemay be, in a time domain, multiplexed with a second resource used fortransmitting the one or more transport blocks. According to an exampleembodiment, the time interval may be a first portion of a first timeduration of a transmission of the preamble. According to an exampleembodiment, the time interval may be a second portion of a second timeduration of a transmission of the one or more transport blocks.According to an example embodiment, the one or more transport blocks maycomprise a wireless device identifier of the wireless device. Accordingto an example embodiment, the wireless device may receive a response tothe first transmission. According to an example embodiment, the responsemay indicate a fallback to a four-step random access procedure.According to an example embodiment, the response may comprise a wirelessdevice identifier of the wireless device that indicates a contentionresolution is successfully complete.

FIG. 40 is a flow diagram as per an aspect of an example embodiment ofthe present disclosure. At 4010, a wireless device may determine that afirst transmission, comprising a preamble transmission and a transportblock transmission, overlaps with a second transmission during a timeinterval. The wireless device may determine that a total transmit power,comprising a first transmit power of the first transmission and a secondtransmit power of the second transmission, is larger than a first valueduring the time interval. At 4020, the wireless device may select, as afirst priority order of the first transmission, the higher priorityorder among a priority order of the preamble transmission and a priorityorder the transport block transmission. The wireless device may selectthe higher priority based on the determination that the firsttransmission overlaps with the second transmission and the totaltransmit power is larger than the first value. At 4030, the wirelessdevice may adjust, based on the first priority order and a secondpriority order of the second transmission, at least one of the firsttransmit power and the second transmit power. At 4040, the wirelessdevice may perform, based on the adjusting, at least one of the firsttransmission and the second transmission.

According to an example embodiment, the first transmission may beperformed as a two-step random access procedure initiated for a beamfailure recovery. According to an example embodiment, the secondtransmission may be a transmission of one or more sounding referencesignals. According to an example embodiment, the first transmission maybe performed on a secondary cell, and the second transmission may beperformed on a primary cell. According to an example embodiment, basedon the first transmission may be performed on a primary cell, thepriority order of the preamble transmission may be selected as the firstpriority order. According to an example embodiment, based on the firsttransmission may be performed on a secondary cell, the priority order ofthe transport block transmission may be selected as the first priorityorder. According to an example embodiment, the first priority order maybe a higher than the second priority order in response to the firsttransmission being performed on a primary cell and the secondtransmission being performed on a secondary cell. According to anexample embodiment, the first priority order is a lower than the secondpriority order in response to the first transmission being performed ona secondary cell and the second transmission being a transmission of oneor more sounding reference signals performed on a primary cell.According to an example embodiment, the adjusting comprising reducingthe first transmit power based on the first priority being lower than orequal to the second priority. According to an example embodiment, theadjustment of the at least one of the first transmit power and thesecond transmit power may comprises a reduction of the second transmitpower based on the first priority being higher than the second priority.According to an example embodiment, the adjustment of the at least oneof the first transmit power and the second transmit power may comprisesa drop of the first transmission based on the first priority being lowerthan or equal to the second priority. According to an exampleembodiment, the adjustment of the at least one of the first transmitpower and the second transmit power may comprise a reduction of thesecond transmission based on the first priority being higher than thesecond priority. According to an example embodiment, the preambletransmission may be a physical random access channel transmission.According to an example embodiment, the transport block transmission maybe a physical uplink shared channel transmission. According to anexample embodiment, the time interval may be a first portion of a firsttime duration of a transmission of the preamble. According to an exampleembodiment, the time interval may be a second portion of a second timeduration of a transmission of the one or more transport blocks.

In this disclosure, “a” and “an” and similar phrases are to beinterpreted as “at least one” and “one or more.” Similarly, any termthat ends with the suffix “(s)” is to be interpreted as “at least one”and “one or more.” In this disclosure, the term “may” is to beinterpreted as “may, for example.” In other words, the term “may” isindicative that the phrase following the term “may” is an example of oneof a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or may not, beemployed to one or more of the various embodiments.

If A and B are sets and every element of A is also an element of B, A iscalled a subset of B. In this specification, only non-empty sets andsubsets are considered. For example, possible subsets of B={cell1,cell2} are: {can}, {cell2}, and {cell1, cell2}. The phrase “based on”(or equally “based at least on”) is indicative that the phrase followingthe term “based on” is an example of one of a multitude of suitablepossibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of thevarious embodiments. The phrase “in response to” (or equally “inresponse at least to”) is indicative that the phrase following thephrase “in response to” is an example of one of a multitude of suitablepossibilities that may, or may not, be employed to one or more of thevarious embodiments. The phrase “depending on” (or equally “depending atleast to”) is indicative that the phrase following the phrase “dependingon” is an example of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities thatmay, or may not, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.The phrase “employing/using” (or equally “employing/using at least”) isindicative that the phrase following the phrase “employing/using” is anexample of one of a multitude of suitable possibilities that may, or maynot, be employed to one or more of the various embodiments.

The term configured may relate to the capacity of a device whether thedevice is in an operational or non-operational state. Configured mayalso refer to specific settings in a device that effect the operationalcharacteristics of the device whether the device is in an operational ornon-operational state. In other words, the hardware, software, firmware,registers, memory values, and/or the like may be “configured” within adevice, whether the device is in an operational or nonoperational state,to provide the device with specific characteristics. Terms such as “acontrol message to cause in a device” may mean that a control messagehas parameters that may be used to configure specific characteristics ormay be used to implement certain actions in the device, whether thedevice is in an operational or non-operational state

In this disclosure, various embodiments are disclosed. Limitations,features, and/or elements from the disclosed example embodiments may becombined to create further embodiments within the scope of thedisclosure.

In this disclosure, parameters (or equally called, fields, orInformation elements: IEs) may comprise one or more information objects,and an information object may comprise one or more other objects. Forexample, if parameter (IE) N comprises parameter (IE) M, and parameter(IE) M comprises parameter (IE) K, and parameter (IE) K comprisesparameter (information element) J. Then, for example, N comprises K, andN comprises J. In an example embodiment, when one or more (or at leastone) message(s) comprise a plurality of parameters, it implies that aparameter in the plurality of parameters is in at least one of the oneor more messages, but does not have to be in each of the one or moremessages. In an example embodiment, when one or more (or at least one)message(s) indicate a value, event and/or condition, it implies that thevalue, event and/or condition is indicated by at least one of the one ormore messages, but does not have to be indicated by each of the one ormore messages.

Furthermore, many features presented above are described as beingoptional through the use of “may” or the use of parentheses. For thesake of brevity and legibility, the present disclosure does notexplicitly recite each and every permutation that may be obtained bychoosing from the set of optional features. However, the presentdisclosure is to be interpreted as explicitly disclosing all suchpermutations. For example, a system described as having three optionalfeatures may be embodied in seven different ways, namely with just oneof the three possible features, with any two of the three possiblefeatures or with all three of the three possible features.

Many of the elements described in the disclosed embodiments may beimplemented as modules. A module is defined here as an element thatperforms a defined function and has a defined interface to otherelements. The modules described in this disclosure may be implemented inhardware, software in combination with hardware, firmware, wetware (i.e.hardware with a biological element) or a combination thereof, all ofwhich may be behaviorally equivalent. For example, modules may beimplemented as a software routine written in a computer languageconfigured to be executed by a hardware machine (such as C, C++,Fortran, Java, Basic, Matlab or the like) or a modeling/simulationprogram such as Simulink, Stateflow, GNU Octave, or LabVIEWMathScript.Additionally, it may be possible to implement modules using physicalhardware that incorporates discrete or programmable analog, digitaland/or quantum hardware. Examples of programmable hardware comprise:computers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, application-specificintegrated circuits (ASICs); field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs); andcomplex programmable logic devices (CPLDs). Computers, microcontrollersand microprocessors are programmed using languages such as assembly, C,C++ or the like. FPGAs, ASICs and CPLDs are often programmed usinghardware description languages (HDL) such as VHSIC hardware descriptionlanguage (VHDL) or Verilog that configure connections between internalhardware modules with lesser functionality on a programmable device. Theabove mentioned technologies are often used in combination to achievethe result of a functional module.

The disclosure of this patent document incorporates material which issubject to copyright protection. The copyright owner has no objection tothe facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent document or thepatent disclosure, as it appears in the Patent and Trademark Officepatent file or records, for the limited purposes required by law, butotherwise reserves all copyright rights whatsoever.

While various embodiments have been described above, it should beunderstood that they have been presented by way of example, and notlimitation. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevantart(s) that various changes in form and detail can be made thereinwithout departing from the scope. In fact, after reading the abovedescription, it will be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art(s)how to implement alternative embodiments. Thus, the present embodimentsshould not be limited by any of the above described exemplaryembodiments.

In addition, it should be understood that any figures which highlightthe functionality and advantages, are presented for example purposesonly. The disclosed architecture is sufficiently flexible andconfigurable, such that it may be utilized in ways other than thatshown. For example, the actions listed in any flowchart may bere-ordered or only optionally used in some embodiments.

Further, the purpose of the Abstract of the Disclosure is to enable theU.S. Patent and Trademark Office and the public generally, andespecially the scientists, engineers and practitioners in the art whoare not familiar with patent or legal terms or phraseology, to determinequickly from a cursory inspection the nature and essence of thetechnical disclosure of the application. The Abstract of the Disclosureis not intended to be limiting as to the scope in any way.

Finally, it is the applicant's intent that only claims that include theexpress language “means for” or “step for” be interpreted under 35U.S.C. 112. Claims that do not expressly include the phrase “means for”or “step for” are not to be interpreted under 35 U.S.C. 112.

What is claimed is:
 1. A method comprising: transmitting, by a wireless device, a first preamble via a first sub-band; determining to perform a first preamble retransmission based on receiving no response to the first preamble; selecting, for the first preamble retransmission, a second sub-band; based on the second sub-band being different from the first sub-band, determining that a transmission power of the first preamble retransmission is based on a same value of a power ramping counter used for transmitting the first preamble; and transmitting, based on the transmission power, a second preamble for the first preamble retransmission via the second sub-band.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the first sub-band and the second sub-band are configured in an unlicensed cell.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein the first sub-band is configured in a first bandwidth part of a cell, and the second sub-band is configured in a second bandwidth part of the cell.
 4. The method of claim 1, wherein the first sub-band and the second sub-band are configured in a third bandwidth part of a cell.
 5. The method of claim 1, further comprising incrementing, based on the receiving no response, a preamble transmission counter.
 6. The method of claim 1, wherein the selecting, for the first preamble retransmission, the second sub-band is based on a listen-before-talk indicating the second sub-band being idle.
 7. The method of claim 1, further comprising: selecting a first downlink reference signal for transmitting the first preamble; and based on determining to perform the first preamble retransmission, selecting a second downlink reference signal for transmitting the second preamble.
 8. The method of claim 7, wherein the determining that the transmission power of the first preamble retransmission is based on the same value of a power ramping counter is further based on the first downlink reference signal and the second downlink reference signal being the same.
 9. The method of claim 1, further comprising: determining to perform a second preamble retransmission based on receiving no response to the second preamble; selecting, for a second preamble retransmission, the second sub-band; based on the selecting the second sub-band, incrementing the power ramping counter; and transmitting, using a second transmission power determined based on the power ramping counter, a third preamble via the second sub-band.
 10. The method of claim 9, wherein the incrementing the power ramping counter is further based on a same downlink reference signal used for the first preamble retransmission being used for the second preamble retransmission.
 11. A wireless device comprising: one or more processors; and memory storing instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the wireless device to: transmit a first preamble via a first sub-band; determine to perform a first preamble retransmission based on receiving no response to the first preamble; select, for the first preamble retransmission, a second sub-band different from the first sub-band; based on the selection of the second sub-band, determine that a transmission power of the first preamble retransmission is based on a same value of a power ramping counter used for transmitting the first preamble; and transmit, based on the transmission power, a second preamble for the first preamble retransmission via the second sub-band.
 12. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the first sub-band and the second sub-band are configured in an unlicensed cell.
 13. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the first sub-band is configured in a first bandwidth part of a cell, and the second sub-band is configured in a second bandwidth part of the cell.
 14. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the first sub-band and the second sub-band are configured in a third bandwidth part of a cell.
 15. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the instructions, when executed by the one or more processors, further cause the wireless device to increment, based on the receiving no response, a preamble transmission counter.
 16. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the instructions, when executed by the one or more processors, further cause the wireless device to: select a first downlink reference signal for transmitting the first preamble; and based on the determination to perform the first preamble retransmission, select a second downlink reference signal for transmitting the second preamble.
 17. The wireless device of claim 16, wherein the determination that the transmission power of the first preamble retransmission is based on the same value of a power ramping counter is further based on the first downlink reference signal and the second downlink reference signal being the same.
 18. The wireless device of claim 11, wherein the instructions, when executed by the one or more processors, further cause the wireless device to: determine to perform a second preamble retransmission based on receiving no response to the second preamble; select, for a second preamble retransmission, the second sub-band; based on the selection of the second sub-band, increment the power ramping counter; and transmit, using a second transmission power determined based on the power ramping counter, a third preamble via the second sub-band.
 19. The wireless device of claim 18, wherein the incrementing the power ramping counter is further based on a same downlink reference signal used for the first preamble retransmission being used for the second preamble retransmission.
 20. A system comprising: a base station; and a wireless device comprising: one or more first processors; and first memory storing first instructions that, when executed by the one or more first processors, cause the wireless device to: transmit, to the base station, a first preamble via a first sub-band; determine to perform a first preamble retransmission based on receiving no response to the first preamble; select, for the first preamble retransmission, a second sub-band different from the first sub-band; based on the selection of the second sub-band, determine that a transmission power of the first preamble retransmission is based on a same value of a power ramping counter used for transmitting the first preamble; and transmit, based on the transmission power, a second preamble for the first preamble retransmission via the second sub-band. 